7. 念处的分别巴利
7. Satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgo
《经分别》中“略说分”的注释巴利
1. Suttantabhājanīyaṃ uddesavāravaṇṇanā
355 355. 现在,紧接着的《念处分别》中,“四种”是数量上的限定。通过这个,说明念处的范围既不在它之下,也不超出它。“念处”有三种:念的所缘也是念处;导师对以三种方式修行的弟子,超越贪著与抗拒的状态也是念处;念本身也是念处。比如在“比丘们,我要讲说四念处的集起与灭没。你们听好……比丘们,什么是身的集起?由食的集起而有身的集起”等(相应部5.408)中,念的所缘被称为念处。同样,在“身是现起处,不是念;念既是现起处也是念”等(无碍解道3.35)中也是如此。它的意思是:它在这里建立,所以叫“处”。什么建立?念。念的处所,就是念处。或者,“处”指主要的立足处;念的处所就是念处,就像象处、马处等一样。巴利
355. Idāni tadanantare satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅge cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo. Tena na tato heṭṭhā na uddhanti satipaṭṭhānaparicchedaṃ dīpeti. Satipaṭṭhānāti tayo satipaṭṭhānā – satigocaropi, tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭidhānunayavītivattatāpi, satipi. ‘‘Catunnaṃ, bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca desessāmi. Taṃ suṇātha…pe… ko ca, bhikkhave, kāyassa samudayo? Āhārasamudayā kāyassa samudayo’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.408) hi satigocaro satipaṭṭhānanti vuccati. Tathā ‘‘kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati. Sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati cā’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 3.35). Tassattho – patiṭṭhāti asminti paṭṭhānaṃ. Kā patiṭṭhāti? Sati. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, padhānaṃ ṭhānanti vā paṭṭhānaṃ; satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ hatthiṭṭhānaassaṭṭhānādīni viya.
“有三种念处,是圣者所依止的;圣者依止而住时,堪能教导大众。”(中部3.304, 311)在这里,对于以三种方式修行的弟子们,导师超越了排斥与贪随的状态,这被称为念处。它的意思是:应当被建立,所以叫“处”,也就是应当让它运作起来。由什么来建立?由念;念的处所,就是念处。然而,在“四念处已修习、已多修习,能圆满七觉支”等(中部3.147)中,念本身就被称为念处。它的意思是:它安住,所以叫“处”,也就是现起、跃入、跳入而运作的意思;念本身以“处”的含义而成为念处;或者,以忆念的含义为念,以现起的含义为处。这样,念既是这个,又是处,所以叫念处。这里所指的就是这个。如果是这样,为什么“念处”要用复数?因为念有多种;由于所缘的差别,那些念是众多的。巴利
‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇaṃ anusāsitumarahatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.304, 311) ettha tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatā satipaṭṭhānanti vuttā. Tassattho – paṭṭhapetabbato paṭṭhānaṃ, pavattayitabbatoti attho. Kena paṭṭhapetabbatoti? Satiyā; satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrentī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.147) pana satiyeva satipaṭṭhānanti vuccati. Tassattho – patiṭṭhātīti paṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhāti okkanditvā pakkhanditvā pavattatīti attho; satiyeva paṭṭhānaṭṭhena satipaṭṭhānaṃ; athavā saraṇaṭṭhena sati, upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena paṭṭhānaṃ. Iti sati ca sā paṭṭhānañcātipi satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Idamidha adhippetaṃ. Yadi evaṃ, kasmā satipaṭṭhānāti bahuvacanaṃ katanti? Satiyā bahuttā; ārammaṇabhedena hi bahukā tā satiyoti.
那么,为什么世尊只说四种念处,不多也不少呢?这是为了适应不同根器的人。在贪行者、见行者、止乘者和观乘者当中,又按钝根和利根各分为两种:对钝根的贪行者来说,粗显的身随观念处是清净之道;对利根的贪行者来说,微细的受随观念处是清净之道。对钝根的见行者来说,不太分化的心随观念处是清净之道;对利根的见行者来说,高度分化的法随观念处是清净之道。对钝根的止乘者来说,容易证得的所缘,也就是第一念处,是清净之道;对利根的止乘者来说,因为不执著粗显的所缘,所以第二念处是清净之道。对钝根的观乘者来说,不太分化的所缘,也就是第三念处,是清净之道;对利根的观乘者来说,高度分化的所缘,也就是第四念处,是清净之道。因此,只说四种,不多也不少。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavatā cattārova satipaṭṭhānā vuttā, anūnā anadhikāti? Veneyyahitattā. Taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritasamathayānikavipassanāyānikesu hi mandatikkhavasena dvidhā pavattesu mandassa taṇhācaritassa oḷārikaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa sukhumaṃ vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Diṭṭhicaritassapi mandassa nātippabhedagataṃ cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa atippabhedagataṃ dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Samathayānikassa ca mandassa akicchena adhigantabbanimittaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa oḷārikārammaṇe asaṇṭhahanato dutiyaṃ. Vipassanāyānikassāpi mandassa nātippabhedagatārammaṇaṃ tatiyaṃ, tikkhassa atippabhedagatārammaṇaṃ catutthaṃ. Iti cattārova vuttā, anūnā anadhikāti.
或者,是为了断除对净、乐、常、我的颠倒执著。身体确实是不净的,可众生却在这上面被“净”的颠倒想所颠倒。为了让他们看清这里的不净,从而断除那种颠倒,所以先说第一个念处。同样,当人们在受、心、法上执取为乐、常、我时,实际上受是苦,心是无常,诸法是无我,而众生却在这些上面被“乐”“常”“我”的颠倒想所颠倒。为了让他们看清其中的苦、无常、无我,从而断除那些颠倒,所以说了其余三个念处。这样就应该知道,为了断除对净、乐、常、我的颠倒执著,只说四个,不多也不少。而且不仅是为了断除颠倒执著,还应当知道,为了断除四种瀑流、四种轭、四种漏、四种结、四种取、四种非行处,以及为了遍知四种食,也同样是只说这四个。以上就是论典的立场。巴利
Subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsappahānatthaṃ vā. Kāyo hi asubho. Tattha subhavipallāsavipallatthā sattā. Tesaṃ tattha asubhabhāvadassanena tassa vipallāsassa pahānatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Sukhaṃ, niccaṃ, attāti gahitesupi ca vedanādīsu vedanā dukkhā, cittaṃ aniccaṃ, dhammā anattā. Etesu ca sukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsavipallatthā sattā. Tesaṃ tattha dukkhādibhāvadassanena tesaṃ vipallāsānaṃ pahānatthaṃ sesāni tīṇi vuttānīti. Evaṃ subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsappahānatthaṃ vā cattārova vuttā anūnā anadhikāti veditabbā. Na kevalañca vipallāsapahānatthameva, atha kho caturoghayogāsavaganthaupādānaagatippahānatthampi catubbidhāhārapariññatthañca cattārova vuttāti veditabbā. Ayaṃ tāva pakaraṇanayo.
不过在义注里,正是这样说的:从归依处来说,以及从汇归一处来说,念处只有一种;从所缘来说,才有四种。这应当这样理解:就像一座有四座城门的城市,从东方来的人,带着东方出产的货物,从东门进入城里;从南方来的人,带着南方出产的货物,从南门进入城里;从西方来的人,带着西方出产的货物,从西门进入城里;从北方来的人,带着北方出产的货物,从北门进入城里。涅槃大城就像那座城市,八支圣道就像城门,身等就像东方等地。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘saraṇavasena ceva ekattasamosaraṇavasena ca ekameva satipaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇavasena cattāroti etadeva vuttaṃ. Yathā hi catudvāre nagare pācīnato āgacchantā pācīnadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, dakkhiṇato, pacchimato, uttarato āgacchantā uttaradisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā uttaradvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ sampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nagaraṃ viya hi nibbānamahānagaraṃ, dvāraṃ viya aṭṭhaṅgiko lokuttaramaggo. Pācīnadisādayo viya kāyādayo.
就像从东方来的人,拿着东方出产的货物,从东门进入城里一样;同样,从身随观这个门进来的人,用十四种方式修习身随观之后,依靠由身随观修习的力量所产生的圣道,都只汇入涅槃这一个归宿。就像从南方来的人,拿着南方出产的货物,从南门进入城里一样;同样,从受随观这个门进来的人,用九种方式修习受随观之后,依靠由受随观修习的力量所产生的圣道,都只汇入涅槃这一个归宿。就像从西方来的人,拿着西方出产的货物,从西门进入城里一样;同样,从心随观这个门进来的人,用十六种方式修习心随观之后,依靠由心随观修习的力量所产生的圣道,都只汇入涅槃这一个归宿。就像从北方来的人,拿着北方出产的货物,从北门进入城里一样;同样,从法随观这个门进来的人,用五种方式修习法随观之后,依靠由法随观修习的力量所产生的圣道,都只汇入涅槃这一个归宿。应当知道,以上就是按归趣来说、以及按同归一处来说,念处只有一个;按所缘对象来说,则说为四种。巴利
Yathā pācīnato āgacchantā pācīnadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ kāyānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā kāyānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti. Yathā dakkhiṇato āgacchantā dakkhiṇadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ vedanānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā vedanānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti. Yathā pacchimato āgacchantā pacchimadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pacchimadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ cittānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā cittānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti. Yathā uttarato āgacchantā uttaradisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā uttaradvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ dhammānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā dhammānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osarantīti. Evaṃ saraṇavasena ceva ekattasamosaraṇavasena ca ekameva satipaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇavasena cattāroti vuttāti veditabbā.
在这里,“诸比丘”这个称呼:世尊虽然是坐在天界讲说这部念处分别,但当时并没有任何一位比丘坐在世尊身边。尽管如此,因为比丘们修习这四种念处,而这些念处正是比丘的行境,所以这里称呼“诸比丘”。那么,难道只有比丘修习这些念处,比丘尼等人就不修习吗?比丘尼等人也修习。不过,比丘是上首众。因为比丘是上首众,所以这里称呼“诸比丘”。或者,是为了显示修行者的比丘身份才这样说。因为凡是实践这种修行的人,就叫做比丘。无论修行者是天人还是人,都可以称为比丘。正如所说——巴利
Idha bhikkhūti ettha kiñcāpi bhagavatā devaloke nisīditvā ayaṃ satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgo kathito, ekabhikkhupi tattha bhagavato santike nisinnako nāma natthi. Evaṃ santepi yasmā ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhikkhū bhāventi, bhikkhugocarā hi ete, tasmā idha bhikkhūti ālapati. Kiṃ panete satipaṭṭhāne bhikkhūyeva bhāventi, na bhikkhunīādayoti? Bhikkhunīādayopi bhāventi. Bhikkhū pana aggaparisā. Iti aggaparisattā idha bhikkhūti ālapati. Paṭipattiyā vā bhikkhubhāvadassanato evamāha. Yo hi imaṃ paṭipattiṃ paṭipajjati, so bhikkhu nāma hoti. Paṭipannako hi devo vā hotu manusso vā, bhikkhūti saṅkhaṃ gacchatiyeva. Yathāha –
即使打扮得漂漂亮亮,也照样可以侍奉。
已寂静、已调御、决定(不退转)、修梵行;
对一切众生都放下棍棒,
他就是婆罗门,他就是沙门,他就是比丘。巴利
‘‘Alaṅkato cepi samañcareyya, Santo danto niyato brahmacārī; Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, So brāhmaṇo so samaṇo sa bhikkhū’’ti. (dha. pa. 142);
身随观的总说释义巴利
Kāyānupassanāuddesavaṇṇanā
“内”指的是属于自己的内在。所以,“于内身”的意思就是“于自己的身体”。这里,“身”指色身。因为在这个语境里,色身是由肢节、头发等法聚合而成的,就像象身、马身、车身那样,所以被称为“身”。正如以聚合之义(称为身),同样也以可厌之物的生起处之义(称为身)。可厌的、极其可厌的那些东西的生起处,也叫“身”。“生起处”就是它们生起的地方。在此,其词源义是:它们生起于彼处,故称“生起处”。什么东西生起呢?可厌的头发等。所以,可厌的头发等的生起处,就是“身”。巴利
Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tasmā ajjhattaṃ kāyeti attano kāyeti attho. Tattha kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca dhammānaṃ samūhaṭṭhena, hatthikāyaassakāyarathakāyādayo viya, kāyoti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ kesādīnaṃ āyoti kāyo.
“身随观”是指习惯于随观身,或者正在随观身。先说了“身”,又说“身随观”,第二次再提“身”这个词,应当知道这是为了显示不混杂的区分、破除密集等含义。因此,这不是在身之中随观受、随观心或随观法,而只是在身之中随观身。这样一来,通过显示在被称为身的所依之上,只有身随观这一种行相,就显示了不混杂的区分。同样地,不是在身之中随观脱离肢节而单独存在的某一法,也不是随观脱离头发、体毛等而存在的男人或女人。在这里,所谓由头发、体毛等构成、被称为四大种及所造色聚合体的身,也不是随观脱离四大种及所造色而单独存在的某一法;而是像随观车部件的人随观肢节的聚合,像随观城市组成部分的人随观头发、体毛等的聚合,像剥开芭蕉树干和叶鞘的人、像解开空拳的人一样,只是随观四大种及所造色的聚合。这样,通过以种种方式、从聚合的角度显示被称为身的所依,就显示了破除密集。因为在这里,除了上述那样的聚合之外,看不到有身、女人、男人或其他任何法。众生只是对上述这些法的聚合,以种种方式产生错误的执著。因此古德说:巴利
Kāyānupassīti kāyaṃ anupassanasīlo, kāyaṃ vā anupassamāno kāyeti ca vatvāpi puna kāyānupassīti dutiyaṃ kāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tena na kāye vedanānupassī cittadhammānupassī vā; atha kho kāye kāyānupassī yevāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī. Yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo, tatthāpi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī; atha kho rathasambhārānupassako viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassī, nagarāvayavānupassako viya kesalomādisamūhānupassī, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibhuñjako viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhako viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassīyevāti nānappakārato samūhavasena kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā itthī vā puriso vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati. Yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatteyeva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
他看见的,并不是被见到的那个;而被见到的那个,他并没有看见。
愚人不见真相,所以被束缚;已经被束缚了,就解脱不了。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati; Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti.
为了显示破除密集等,所以这样说。这里通过“等”这个字,还应当了解这个意思:这个人就在这个身体上,只是身随观者,而不是其他法的随观者。这话说的是什么意思呢?譬如在没有水的阳焰上,也有人把它随观为水;但在这个无常、苦、无我、不净的身体上,并不是这样随观为常、乐、我、净。身随观者,只是随观无常、苦、无我、不净这些相状的聚集。这就是所说的意思。或者,像《大念处经》里以“诸比丘,在这里,比丘去了林野……他具念地入息”等这样的方式,从入出息开始一直到碎骨为止所说的身;以及《无碍解道》里所说的身:“在这里,有人随观地身为无常,也同样随观水身、火身、风身、发身、毛身、皮肤身、皮身、肉身、血身、筋身、骨身、骨髓身为无常。”对于这一切,因为都是在这个身体上作随观,所以“于身随观身”的意思也应当这样来看。巴利
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena cettha ayampi attho veditabbo – ayañhi etasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassino honti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattaasubhabhūteyeva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhaattasubhabhāvānupassī; atha kho kāyānupassī aniccadukkhānattaasubhākārasamūhānupassīyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yvāyaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhāne ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā…pe… so satova assasatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107) nayena assāsapassāsādicuṇṇakajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkāyaṃ aniccato anupassati, tathā āpokāyaṃ, tejokāyaṃ, vāyokāyaṃ, kesakāyaṃ, lomakāyaṃ, chavikāyaṃ, cammakāyaṃ, maṃsakāyaṃ, rudhirakāyaṃ, nhārukāyaṃ, aṭṭhikāyaṃ, aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti paṭisambhidāyaṃ kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
或者,由于不随观身中任何可以被执取为“我”或“我所”的东西,而只随观那头发、体毛等种种法的集合,所以“于身随观身”的意思应当这样理解:随观那被称为头发等法之集合的身。再者,按照《无碍解道》中“于此身,随观无常,而不随观常”等所说的次第,由于随观那以无常相等为形态的一切行集合——也就是被称为身的东西,所以“于身随观身”也可以这样理解其含义。巴利
Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā evaṃ gahetabbassa kassaci ananupassanato, tassa tasseva pana kesalomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādidhammasamūhasaṅkhāte kāyānupassīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Apica ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.35) anukkamena paṭisambhidāyaṃ āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādino ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassa anupassanatopi kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
正因为这样,这位已经走上身随观之道的比丘,依照无常随观等七种随观来观察这个身体:他观察它是无常的,而不是常的;观察它是苦的,而不是乐的;观察它是无我的,而不是我的;他厌离,而不欢喜;他离贪,而不贪染;他息灭,而不集起;他舍遣,而不执取。应当知道:他观察无常时,就舍断常想;观察苦时,就舍断乐想;观察无我时,就舍断我想;厌离时,就舍断欢喜;离贪时,就舍断贪;息灭时,就舍断集起;舍遣时,就舍断执取。巴利
Tathā hi ayaṃ kāye kāyānupassanāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno bhikkhu imaṃ kāyaṃ aniccānupassanādīnaṃ sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena aniccato anupassati no niccato, dukkhato anupassati no sukhato, anattato anupassati no attato, nibbindati no nandati, virajjati no rajjati, nirodheti no samudeti, paṭinissajjati no ādiyati. So taṃ aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati, dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ pajahati, anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ pajahati , nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati, virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati, nirodhento samudayaṃ pajahati, paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatīti (paṭi. ma. 3.35) veditabbo.
“住”是指:与四种威仪中的某一种威仪相应,这一点是在说明(住)与某种威仪相结合。意思是:用另一种威仪打断这一威仪所造成的逼迫,使身体持续运行、活动而不倒下。巴利
Viharatīti catūsu iriyāpathavihāresu aññataravihārasamāyogaparidīpanametaṃ, ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aparena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā apatamānaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavattetīti attho.
“外身”是指别人的身体。“内外身”是指有时是自己的身体,有时是别人的身体。因为第一种方式说的是对自己的身体把握身,第二种方式说的是对别人的身体把握身,第三种方式说的是有时对自己、有时对别人的身体把握身。然而,并不存在一个叫做“内外”的混合所缘。这里说的是,对于已经熟练的业处,辗转交替观察的时机。“精勤”这个词,是用来表明与把握身的精进相应。因为他那时具备那种精进,那种精进在三有中烧灼烦恼,所以称为“热勤”,因此他被称为“精勤”。巴利
Bahiddhākāyeti parassa kāye. Ajjhattabahiddhā kāyeti kālena attano kāye, kālena parassa kāye. Paṭhamanayena hi attano kāye kāyapariggaho vutto, dutiyanayena parassa kāye, tatiyanayena kālena attano kālena parassa kāye. Ajjhattabahiddhā pana ghaṭitārammaṇaṃ nāma natthi. Paguṇakammaṭṭhānassa pana aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakālo ettha kathito. Ātāpīti kāyapariggāhakavīriyasamāyogaparidīpanametaṃ. So hi yasmā tasmiṃ samaye yaṃ taṃ vīriyaṃ tīsu bhavesu kilesānaṃ ātāpanato ātāpoti vuccati, tena samannāgato hoti, tasmā ātāpīti vuccati.
“正知”是指具备那种与把握身体相关的、被称为正知的智慧。“具念”是指具备那种与把握身体相关的念。然而,因为他是先用念把握所缘,再用慧去随观,而离开了念就不可能有随观,所以世尊才说:“比丘们,我说念在一切处都是需要的。”因此,仅凭“于身随观身而住”这一句,就已经说到了身随观念处这个业处。或者也可以这样理解:不精勤的人内心会昏沉,成为障碍;不正知的人在把握方法和避开不当方法时会迷惑;失念的人则没有能力舍弃不当方法、把握正确方法,所以他的业处无法成就。因此,为了显示那些能依靠其力量使业处成就的法,才说了“精勤、正知、具念”。巴利
Sampajānoti kāyapariggāhakena sampajaññasaṅkhātena ñāṇena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati, na hi sativirahitassa anupassanā nāma atthi, tenevāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234), tasmā ettha ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti ettāvatā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānakammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yasmā anātāpino antosaṅkhepo antarāyakaro hoti, asampajāno upāyapariggahe anupāyaparivajjane ca sammuyhati, muṭṭhassatī upāyāpariccāge anupāyāpariggahe ca asamatthova hoti, tenassa taṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ na sampajjati; tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ sampajjati tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī sampajāno satimā’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
这样,先说明了身随观念处的相应支,现在为了说明断除支,所以说了“于世间断除贪忧”。其中,“断除”是指以彼分断或镇伏断来断除。“世间”:在这里,那已被把握的、分为内等的身,就是此处所说的世间。意思是在那个世间里断除贪忧。又因为这里用“贪”这个词摄入了欲贪,用“忧”这个词摄入了嗔恚,所以应当知道,这是通过显示这两种属于盖的强有力之法,来说明了断除诸盖。巴利
Iti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ sampayogaṅgañca dassetvā idāni pahānaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti vuttaṃ. Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi ettha yvāyaṃ ajjhattādibhedo kāyo pariggahito sveva idha loko nāma. Tasmiṃ loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ vinayitvāti attho. Yasmā panettha abhijjhāgahaṇena kāmacchando, domanassaggahaṇena byāpādo saṅgahaṃ gacchati, tasmā nīvaraṇapariyāpannabalavadhammadvayadassanena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
这里要特别说明:通过断除贪,断除了以身体健全为根源的贪著;通过断除忧,断除了以身体衰败为根源的抗拒;通过断除贪,断除了对身体的喜乐;通过断除忧,断除了对身体修习的不喜乐;通过断除贪,断除了把不真实的净、乐等性质附加到身体上;通过断除忧,断除了对身体真实的非净、苦等性质的排斥。由此,显示了瑜伽行者的瑜伽力量和瑜伽能力。这确实就是瑜伽力量:远离贪著与抗拒,能承受不喜乐与喜乐,不附加不真实的东西,也不排斥真实的东西。而远离贪著与抗拒、能承受不喜乐与喜乐、不附加不真实且不排斥真实的人,就是有瑜伽能力的人。巴利
Visesena cettha abhijjhāvinayena kāyasampattimūlakassa anurodhassa, domanassavinayena kāyavipattimūlakassa virodhassa, abhijjhāvinayena ca kāye abhiratiyā, domanassavinayena kāyabhāvanāya anabhiratiyā, abhijjhāvinayena kāye abhūtānaṃ subhasukhabhāvādīnaṃ pakkhepassa, domanassavinayena kāye bhūtānaṃ asubhāsukhabhāvādīnaṃ apanayanassa ca pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena yogāvacarassa yogānubhāvo yogasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti. Yogānubhāvo hi esa yadidaṃ anurodhavirodhavippamutto, aratiratisaho, abhūtapakkhepabhūtāpanayanavirahito ca hoti. Anurodhavirodhavippamutto cesa aratiratisaho abhūtaṃ apakkhipanto bhūtañca anapanento yogasamattho hotīti.
另一种理解方式:在“于身随观身”这句话里,说的是以随观作为修行所缘。在“住”这句话里,说的是依照所说的安住方式,修行者对所缘之身的维护。在“精勤”等词中,应当知道:以精勤说明正勤,以念和正知说明适用于一切处的修行所缘,或者说明维护修行所缘的方法;也可以说,以念说明通过身随观而获得的止,以正知说明观,以断除贪忧说明修习的果报。以上就是对身随观念处总说的义解。巴利
Aparo nayo – ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti ettha anupassanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Viharatīti ettha vuttavihārena kammaṭṭhānikassa kāyapariharaṇaṃ. Ātāpītiādīsu ātāpena sammappadhānaṃ, satisampajaññena sabbatthikakammaṭṭhānaṃ, kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇūpāyo vā; satiyā vā kāyānupassanāvasena paṭiladdhasamatho, sampajaññena vipassanā , abhijjhādomanassavinayena bhāvanāphalaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānuddesassa atthavaṇṇanā.
受随观等总说释巴利
Vedanānupassanādiuddesavaṇṇanā
在受随观的简说等处,内、外等也应依照已经说过的方式来了知。因为在这里也同样说了三种占有:对自己的受等、对他人的受等、有时对自己的有时对他人的受等。而在“于受观受”等表述中,再次提到受等的用意,也应依照在身随观中已说的方法来了知。在“于受观受、于心观心、于法观法”中,这里的“受”指三种受,而且都是世间的;心也是世间的,法也一样。它们的分类将在广说部分中明确。但在这里,只应理解为:按照应当观照受的方式去观照,就是“于受观受”。对心和法也是同样的道理。那么,应当怎样观照受呢?乐受应观为苦,苦受应观为箭,不苦不乐受应观为无常。正如所说——巴利
Vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānuddesādīsupi ajjhattādīni vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. Etesupi hi attano vedanādīsu, parassa vedanādīsu, kālena attano kālena parassa vedanādīsūti tividho pariggaho vutto. Vedanāsu vedanānupassītiādīsu ca vedanādīnaṃ punavacane payojanaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī, citte cittānupassī, dhammesu dhammānupassīti ettha pana vedanāti tisso vedanā. Tā ca lokiyā eva; cittampi lokiyaṃ, tathā dhammā. Tesaṃ vibhāgo niddesavāre pākaṭo bhavissati. Kevalaṃ panidha yathā vedanā anupassitabbā tathā anupassanto ‘‘vedanāsu vedanānupassī’’ti veditabbo. Esa nayo cittadhammesu. Kathañca vedanā anupassitabbāti? Sukhā tāva vedanā dukkhato, dukkhā sallato, adukkhamasukhā aniccato. Yathāha –
如果有人把乐看成苦,把苦看成箭,
他看见那寂静的不苦不乐是无常的。
那位确实具足正见的比丘,会寂静地而行。巴利
‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, addakkhi naṃ aniccato; Sa ve sammadaso bhikkhu, upasanto carissatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253);
这一切都应观为苦。正如经中所说:“凡是所感受的,我都说它是苦。”也应从乐和苦两方面来观照,就像经中所说:“毗舍佉贤友,乐受住时是乐,变坏时是苦。”这一切都应详细展开。此外,还应以无常等七种观照来观照。其余的将在广说部分中明了。巴利
Sabbā eva cetā dukkhātipi anupassitabbā. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259). Sukhadukkhatopi ca anupassitabbā, yathāha – ‘‘sukhā kho, āvuso visākha, vedanā ṭhitisukhā, vipariṇāmadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465) sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Apica aniccādisattānupassanāvasenapi (paṭi. ma. 3.35) anupassitabbā. Sesaṃ niddesavāreyeva pākaṭaṃ bhavissati.
在心法这一类里,先要观心:按照所缘、增上、俱生、地、业、果报、唯作等种种差别,按照无常等随观,以及按照广说分中讲到的有贪等分类来观照。至于法,则要按照自相与共相、空性法、无常等七种随观,以及按照广说分中讲到的有与无等分类来观照。其余内容跟前面所说的一样。在这里,虽然一个人在名为身的世间已经断除了贪和忧,但他在受等其他世间也同样断除了这些。不过,这是根据不同的人以及不同心刹那的念住修习来说的,所以在一切处都这样讲。或者说,因为在一处断除了,在其余各处也就断除了,为了显示他于彼处的断除,才这样说的,应当如此了知。巴利
Cittadhammesupi cittaṃ tāva ārammaṇādhipatisahajātabhūmikammavipākakiriyādinānattabhedānaṃ aniccādinupassanānaṃ niddesavāre āgatasarāgādibhedānañca vasena anupassitabbaṃ. Dhammā salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇānaṃ suññatādhammassa aniccādisattānupassanānaṃ niddesavāre āgatasantāsantādibhedānañca vasena anupassitabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kāmañcettha yassa kāyasaṅkhāte loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīnaṃ, tassa vedanādilokesupi taṃ pahīnameva. Nānāpuggalavasena pana nānācittakkhaṇikasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāvasena ca sabbattha vuttaṃ. Yato vā ekattha pahīnaṃ, sesesupi pahīnaṃ hoti. Tenevassa tattha pahānadassanatthampi evaṃ vuttanti veditabbanti.
身随观广说的解释巴利
Kāyānupassanāniddesavaṇṇanā
356 356. 现在,就像一位灵巧的竹匠,想要制作粗席、细席、竹篮、竹箱、竹篓等器具,得到一根大竹子后,把它切成四段,然后取每一段竹子,劈开来,制成各种器具;又像一位灵巧的金匠,想要打造各式各样的饰品,得到一块非常纯净的金块后,把它分成四份,然后取每一份,打造出各种饰品。同样地,世尊欲借念处教说令众生获得种种殊胜的成就,把同一个正念按所缘分为四种,也就是“四念处——在此,比丘于内身随观身而住”等。然后,取每一种念处,逐一分别解说,于是以“比丘如何于内身……”等方式,开始进行详细解释。巴利
356. Idāni seyyathāpi nāma cheko vilīvakārako thūlakilañjasaṇhakilañjacaṅkoṭakapeḷāpuṭādīni upakaraṇāni kattukāmo ekaṃ mahāveḷuṃ labhitvā catudhā chinditvā tato ekekaṃ veḷukhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā phāletvā taṃ taṃ upakaraṇaṃ kareyya, yathā vā pana cheko suvaṇṇakāro nānāvihitaṃ piḷandhanavikatiṃ kattukāmo suparisuddhaṃ suvaṇṇaghaṭikaṃ labhitvā catudhā bhinditvā tato ekekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ gahetvā taṃ taṃ piḷandhanaṃ kareyya, evameva bhagavā satipaṭṭhānadesanāya sattānaṃ anekappakāraṃ visesādhigamaṃ kattukāmo ekameva sammāsatiṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā – idha bhikkhu ajjhattaṃ kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’tiādinā nayena ārammaṇavasena catudhā bhinditvā tato ekekaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vibhajanto kathañca bhikkhu ajjhattaṃ kāyetiādinā nayena niddesavāraṃ vattumāraddho.
其中,“如何”等语,是为了详细解说而发起的提问,表示想要开讲。这里简要的意思是:比丘以什么样的行相、什么样的方式,于内身随观身而住呢?其余那些提问句也都是同样的道理。这里说“比丘”,是指在这教法中的比丘。因为这里的“此”这个词,一方面指明了能生起一切种类身随观的人所依止的教法,另一方面也否定了别的教法能有这样的情况。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,只有在这里才有沙门……别的教法都是空的,没有沙门。”(《中部》1.139;《增支部》4.241)因此说“在这教法中的比丘”。巴利
Tattha kathañcātiādi vitthāretuṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – kena ca ākārena kena pakārena bhikkhu ajjhattaṃ kāye kāyānupassī viharatīti? Sesapucchāvāresupi eseva nayo. Idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhettha idha-saddo ajjhattādivasena sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241). Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti.
“内身”就是自己的身体。“从脚底往上”是从脚底向上。“从发梢往下”是从发梢向下。“以皮肤为边界”是横向以皮肤为界限。“充满种种不净而观察”是说,他观察这个身体充满了发等种种不净。怎么观察呢?就是“在这个身体里有发……中间省略……尿”。其中,“有”是存在、具有的意思。“在这个”是指在那个被说为“从脚底往上、从发梢往下、横向以皮肤为边界、充满种种不净”的身体当中。“身”就是身体。因为身体是不净的堆积,是发等可厌之物的堆积,也是眼病等几百种疾病的产生之处,所以称为“身”。巴利
Ajjhattaṃ kāyanti attano kāyaṃ. Uddhaṃ pādatalāti pādatalato upari. Adho kesamatthakāti kesaggato heṭṭhā. Tacapariyantanti tiriyaṃ tacaparicchinnaṃ. Pūraṃ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhatīti nānappakārakesādiasucibharito ayaṃ kāyoti passati. Kathaṃ? Atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā…pe… muttanti. Tattha atthīti saṃvijjanti. Imasminti yvāyaṃ uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tiriyaṃ tacapariyanto pūro nānappakārassa asucinoti vuccati tasmiṃ. Kāyeti sarīre. Sarīrañhi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṃ kesādīnañceva cakkhurogādīnañca rogasatānaṃ āyabhūtato kāyoti vuccati.
“头发、体毛”这些,就是头发等三十二种身体成分。其中应当这样理解它们的关联:在这个身体里有头发,在这个身体里有体毛。因为在这个从脚底往上、从头顶往下、横向以皮肤为边界的约一寻高的身躯里,即使从各个方面仔细寻找,也看不到任何珍珠、摩尼珠、琉璃、沉香、藏红花、樟脑或香粉之类哪怕极微小的清净之物,而只看到极其臭秽、令人厌恶、丑陋难看的种种头发、体毛等不净之物。因此说:“在这个身体里有头发、体毛……乃至……尿。”以上就是从词句关联的角度所作的解释。巴利
Kesā lomāti ete kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā. Tattha atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā, atthi imasmiṃ kāye lomāti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Imasmiñhi pādatalato paṭṭhāya upari, kesamatthakā paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā, tacato paṭṭhāya tiriyantatoti ettake byāmamatte kaḷevare sabbākārenapi vicinanto na koci kiñci muttaṃ vā maṇiṃ vā veḷuriyaṃ vā agaruṃ vā kuṅkumaṃ vā kappūraṃ vā vāsacuṇṇādiṃ vā aṇumattampi sucibhāvaṃ passati, atha kho paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ assirīkadassanaṃ nānappakāraṃ kesalomādibhedaṃ asuciṃyeva passati. Tena vuttaṃ – atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā lomā…pe… muttanti. Ayamettha padasambandhato vaṇṇanā.
想要修习这个业处、证得阿罗汉果的善男子,首先要清净四种戒,安住在极清净的戒上;然后断除十种障碍中存在的任何一种障碍;再通过修习厌恶作意业处,生起初禅;以禅那作为近依,建立毗婆舍那。最起码,他应当到一位已证得阿罗汉果或不还果等其中某一果、精通附有义注的巴利圣典、堪为善知识的持法阿阇梨面前学习这个业处。如果在同一个住处找不到这样清净的善知识,就应该前往他居住的地方去学习。其中,四种戒的清净、障碍与断除障碍,以及亲近阿阇梨的方法,在《清净道论》中都已详细讲述。因此,应当依照那里所讲的方式来了知。巴利
Imaṃ pana kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇitukāmena kulaputtena āditova catubbidhaṃ sīlaṃ sodhetvā suparisuddhasīle patiṭṭhitena, yvāyaṃ dasasu palibodhesu palibodho atthi taṃ upacchinditvā, paṭikkūlamanasikārakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāya paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā, jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā, arahattaṃ anāgāmiphalādīsu vā aññataraṃ pattassa sabbantimena paricchedena sāṭṭhakathāya pāḷiyā kataparicayassa tantiācariyassāpi kalyāṇamittassa santike uggahetabbaṃ. Visuddhaṃ tathārūpaṃ kalyāṇamittaṃ ekavihāre alabhantena tassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā uggahetabbaṃ. Tattha catubbidhasīlavisodhanañceva (visuddhi. 1.19) palibodho (visuddhi. 1.41) ca palibodhupacchedo ca ācariyassa santikaṃ upasaṅkamanavidhānañca sabbampi visuddhimagge vitthārato kathitaṃ. Tasmā taṃ tattha kathitanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
老师讲解业处的时候,应该分三种情况来讲。有一种比丘,本来就已经掌握了业处。对他,应该让他先在一两次坐禅的时段里诵习,然后再给他讲。有一种比丘,是想在老师身边住下来学习的。对他,应该在他每次来的时候给他讲。有一种比丘,学了之后就要去别的地方。对他,应该讲得不啰嗦也不过于简略,把没有杂乱、没有纠结的业处讲给他。讲的时候应该说明什么?应该说明七种掌握的方法和十种作意的方法。巴利
Ācariyena pana kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena tividhena kathetabbaṃ. Eko bhikkhu pakatiyā uggahitakammaṭṭhāno hoti. Tassa ekaṃ dve nisajjavāre sajjhāyaṃ kāretvā kathetabbaṃ. Eko santike vasitvā uggaṇhitukāmo hoti. Tassa āgatāgatavelāya kathetabbaṃ. Eko uggaṇhitvā aññattha gantukāmo hoti. Tassa nātipapañcaṃ nātisaṅkhepaṃ katvā nijjaṭaṃ niggaṇṭhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetabbaṃ. Kathentena kiṃ ācikkhitabbanti? Sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ dasadhā ca manasikārakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ.
在这里,应当讲解七种掌握业处的善巧:以言语、以心意、从颜色、从形状、从方位、从处所、从界限。因为在这个厌恶作意的业处中,即使是通达三藏的人,在作意时也应当首先以言语诵习。对某些人来说,正是在诵习的时候,业处就变得清晰了,就像在摩罗耶山的大天长老跟前学习业处的那两位长老一样。据说,那两位长老请求大天长老教授业处,长老给了他们三十二身分的经文,说:“你们这样诵习四个月吧。”他们虽然已经精通两三部尼柯耶,但因为恭敬顺从,在四个月里只是诵习三十二身分,就证得了入流果。巴利
Tattha vacasā manasā vaṇṇato saṇṭhānato disato okāsato paricchedatoti evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Imasmiñhi paṭikkūlamanasikārakammaṭṭhāne yopi tipiṭako hoti, tenapi manasikārakāle paṭhamaṃ vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Ekaccassa hi sajjhāyaṃ karontasseva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, malayavāsīmahādevattherassa santike uggahitakammaṭṭhānānaṃ dvinnaṃ therānaṃ viya. Thero kira tehi kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācito ‘cattāro māse imaṃ evaṃ sajjhāyaṃ karothā’ti dvattisākārapāḷiṃ adāsi. Te, kiñcāpi tesaṃ dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā, padakkhiṇaggāhitāya pana cattāro māse dvattiṃsākāraṃ sajjhāyantāva sotāpannā ahesuṃ.
因此,教导业处的老师应该对弟子说:“首先,你要先用语言来诵习。”诵习的时候,应该先划定皮五法等等,然后按照顺行和逆行的方式来诵习。也就是先念“头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿、皮肤”,然后再倒过来念“皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发”。接着在肾五法里,先念“肉、筋、骨、骨髓、肾”,然后再倒过来念“肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发”。然后在肺五法里,先念“心脏、肝脏、肋膜、脾脏、肺”,然后再倒过来念“肺、脾脏、肋膜、肝脏、心脏、肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮肤、牙齿、指甲、体毛、头发”。巴利
Tasmā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena ācariyena antevāsiko vattabbo – ‘paṭhamaṃ tāva vācāya sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti. Karontena ca tacapañcakādīni paricchinditvā anulomapaṭilomavasena sajjhāyo kātabbo. ‘‘Kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco’’ti hi vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tadanantaraṃ vakkapañcake ‘‘maṃsaṃ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṃ vakka’’nti vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tato papphāsapañcake ‘‘hadayaṃ yakanaṃ kilomakaṃ pihakaṃ papphāsa’’nti vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
接下来,脑虽然未载入这个传承,但《无碍解道》(Paṭi. Ma. 1.4)中出现了,要在粪之后把它纳入传承。在这个脑五法中,先说“肠、肠间膜、胃中物、粪、脑”,然后再逆序说“脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠、肺、脾、肋膜、肝、心脏、肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齿、爪、毛、发”。巴利
Tato imaṃ tantiṃ anāruḷhampi paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.4) āgataṃ matthaluṅgaṃ karīsāvasāne tantiṃ āropetvā imasmiṃ matthaluṅgapañcake ‘‘antaṃ antaguṇaṃ udariyaṃ karīsaṃ matthaluṅga’’nti vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
接着,在脂肪六法中,先说了“胆汁、痰、脓、血、汗、脂肪”,然后再逆序说:“脂肪、汗、血、脓、痰、胆汁、脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠、肺、脾脏、肋膜、肝脏、心脏、肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齿、爪、毛、发。”巴利
Tato medachakke ‘‘pittaṃ semhaṃ pubbo lohitaṃ sedo medo’’ti vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘medo sedo lohitaṃ pubbo semhaṃ pittaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
接着,在尿的六法里,先这样说:“泪、油脂、唾液、鼻涕、关节滑液、尿”,然后再逆着顺序说:“尿、关节滑液、鼻涕、唾液、油脂、泪、脂肪、汗、血、脓、痰、胆汁、脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠、肺、脾脏、肋膜、肝脏、心脏、肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齿、爪、毛、发”。这样应当以言语诵习百遍、千遍、十万遍。因为通过言语诵习,业处传承就会变得熟练;心不会从这里那里到处乱跑;各个身体部分会变得清楚,显现得像手镯一样,也显现得像栅栏的行列一样。而且,正如以言语诵习,同样也应当以心意诵习。因为言语诵习是心意诵习的缘,心意诵习是洞察特相的缘,洞察特相是洞察道果的缘。巴利
Tato muttachakke ‘‘assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā mutta’’nti vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘muttaṃ lasikā siṅghāṇikā kheḷo vasā assu medo sedo lohitaṃ pubbo semhaṃ pittaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti evaṃ kālasatampi kālasahassampi kālasatasahassampi vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyena hi kammaṭṭhānatanti paguṇā hoti; na ito cito ca cittaṃ vidhāvati; koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā honti, hatthasaṅkhalikā viya khāyanti, vatipādapanti viya ca khāyanti. Yathā ca pana vacasā, tatheva manasāpi sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyo hi manasā sajjhāyassa paccayo hoti. Manasā sajjhāyo lakkhaṇapaṭivedhassa paccayo hoti. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedho maggaphalapaṭivedhassa paccayo hoti.
“从颜色来说”:要确定头发等的颜色。“从形状来说”:要确定这些(头发等)各自的形状。“从方位来说”:在这个身体里,肚脐以上是上方,肚脐以下是下方。所以,应当确定“这个部分属于某某方位”。“从处所来说”:应当这样确定每一个部分的处所:“这个部分安住在某某处所”。“从界限来说”:有同分界限和异分界限两种。其中,同分界限应当这样理解:“这个部分在下方、上方和周边以这个为界限。”异分界限应当这样理解:“头发不是体毛,体毛也不是头发。”也就是以不混杂的方式来理解。巴利
‘Vaṇṇato’ti kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇo vavatthapetabbo. ‘Saṇṭhānato’ti tesaṃyeva saṇṭhānaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ . ‘Disato’ti imasmiṃ sarīre nābhito uddhaṃ uparimā disā, adho heṭṭhimā disā. Tasmā ‘‘ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imissā nāma disāyā’’ti disā vavatthapetabbā. ‘Okāsato’ti ‘‘ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imasmiṃ nāma okāse patiṭṭhito’’ti evaṃ tassa tassa okāso vavatthapetabbo. ‘Paricchedato’ti sabhāgaparicchedo visabhāgaparicchedoti dve paricchedā. Tattha ‘‘ayaṃ koṭṭhāso heṭṭhā ca upari ca tiriyañca iminā nāma paricchinno’’ti evaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo. ‘‘Kesā na lomā, lomāpi na kesā’’ti evaṃ amissīkatavasena visabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo.
在这样用七种方式讲完取相的善巧之后,还应当先弄清楚“这个业处在某部经里是按厌恶的方式说的,在某部经里是按界的方式说的”,然后再来讲。因为身至念在《大念处经》里纯粹是按厌恶的方式说的,在《大象迹喻经》《大罗睺罗教诫经》《界分别经》里是按界的方式说的。而在《身至念经》里,则是针对那些以色相现起的人,分别讲了四种禅那。其中,按界的方式说的是观禅业处,按厌恶的方式说的是止禅业处。他们就说,这里讲的这个止禅业处,是普遍地、共通于一切修行者来讲的。巴利
Evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhantena pana ‘‘idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ asukasmiṃ sutte paṭikkūlavasena kathitaṃ, asukasmiṃ dhātuvasenā’’ti ñatvā ācikkhitabbaṃ. Idañhi mahāsatipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. 2.372; ma. ni. 1.105 ādayo) paṭikkūlavaseneva kathitaṃ, mahāhatthipadopama (ma. ni. 1.300 ādayo) -mahārāhulovāda (ma. ni. 2.113 ādayo) -dhātuvibhaṅgesu (ma. ni. 3.342 ādayo) dhātuvasena kathitaṃ. Kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153 ādayo) pana yassa vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāya cattāri jhānāni vibhattāni. Tattha dhātuvasena kathitaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, paṭikkūlavasena kathitaṃ samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadetaṃ idha samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ avisesato sabbasādhāraṇavasena kathitanti vadantiyevāti.
像这样用七种方式讲完取相的善巧之后,应当接着讲十种作意的善巧,也就是:按渐次、不太急、不太慢、排除散乱、超越名称概念、渐次舍离、安止,以及三种经。其中,“按渐次”是指从诵习开始,就应当按顺序依次作意,不要跳着来。如果跳着作意,就像一个不熟练的人爬三十二级的阶梯,跳着台阶往上爬,身体累了就会摔下来,没办法爬完;同样,还没靠修习成就的力量证得那种殊胜的喜乐,心就累了、退堕了,没办法完成修习。巴利
Evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhitvā ‘‘anupubbato, nātisīghato, nātisaṇikato, vikkhepapaṭibāhanato, paṇṇattisamatikkamanato, anupubbamuñcanato, appanāto, tayo ca suttantā’’ti evaṃ dasadhā manasikārakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Tattha ‘anupubbato’ti idañhi sajjhāyakaraṇato paṭṭhāya anupaṭipāṭiyā manasikātabbaṃ, na ekantarikāya. Ekantarikāya hi manasikaronto yathā nāma akusalo puriso dvattiṃsapadaṃ nisseṇiṃ ekantarikāya ārohanto kilantakāyo patati, na ārohanaṃ sampādeti; evameva bhāvanāsampattivasena adhigantabbassa assādassa anadhigamā kilantacitto patati, na bhāvanaṃ sampādeti.
按渐次作意时,也应该“不过急”地作意。因为如果作意过急,就像一个人走上三由旬的路,却不留意脚的抬起和落下,只是飞快地奔走,即使来回走了七趟,路虽然走完了,还是得问过路才知道怎么走。同样,业处虽然达到了终点,却不清楚明了,不能带来殊胜的证得。所以,不应该过急地作意。巴利
Anupubbato manasikarontenāpi ca ‘nātisīghato’ manasikātabbaṃ. Atisīghato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tiyojanaṃ maggaṃ paṭipajjitvā okkamanavissajjanaṃ asallakkhetvā sīghena javena sattakkhattumpi gamanāgamanaṃ karoto purisassa kiñcāpi addhānaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchati, atha kho pucchitvāva gantabbaṃ hoti; evameva kevalaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpuṇāti, avibhūtaṃ pana hoti, na visesaṃ āvahati. Tasmā nātisīghato manasikātabbaṃ.
就像不能太急一样,也不能太慢。因为如果作意太慢,就好比一个人想当天走完三由旬的路,却在途中因为树木、山丘、丛林等而耽搁,路就走不完,得要两三天才能走完;同样,业处也到不了终点,不能成为证得殊胜的助缘。巴利
Yathā ca nātisīghato evaṃ ‘nātisaṇikato’pi. Atisaṇikato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tadaheva tiyojanaṃ maggaṃ gantukāmassa purisassa antarāmagge rukkhapabbatagahanādīsu vilambamānassa maggo parikkhayaṃ na gacchati, dvīhatīhena pariyosāpetabbo hoti; evameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchati, visesādhigamassa paccayo na hoti.
“遮止散乱”的意思是:放下业处之后,应当遮止心向外在种种所缘的散乱。如果不遮止,就像有人走在只容一脚宽的悬崖险道上,不留意落脚的地方,东张西望,结果一步踏空,就会掉进百仞深渊。同样,一旦向外散乱,业处就会退失、败坏。所以,应当以遮止散乱来作意。巴利
‘Vikkhepapaṭibāhanato’ti kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cetaso vikkhepo paṭibāhitabbo. Appaṭibāhato hi yathā nāma ekapadikaṃ papātamaggaṃ paṭipannassa purisassa akkamanapadaṃ asallakkhetvā ito cito ca vilokayato padavāro virajjhati, tato sataporise papāte patitabbaṃ hoti; evameva bahiddhā vikkhepe sati kammaṭṭhānaṃ parihāyati, paridhaṃsati. Tasmā vikkhepapaṭibāhanato manasikātabbaṃ.
所谓“超越施设”,就是指:像“头发、体毛”这一类施设,要超越它,把心安住在“厌恶”上。就像缺水的时候,人们在树林里看到一口水井,就在那里绑上棕榈叶之类的东西做个标记,靠着这个标记来洗澡、喝水;可是当他们来来往往走多了,走过的路变得很明显之后,标记就没用了,想什么时候去就什么时候去,洗澡、喝水都行。同样,在修行初期,以“头发、体毛”这些施设来作意时,厌恶的状态会变得明显。那时,就要超越“头发、体毛”这些施设,把心直接安住在厌恶的状态上。巴利
‘Paṇṇattisamatikkamanato’ti yā ayaṃ ‘‘kesā lomā’’ti ādikā paṇṇatti taṃ atikkamitvā paṭikkūlanti cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Yathā hi udakadullabhakāle manussā araññe udapānaṃ disvā tattha tālapaṇṇādikaṃ kiñcideva saññāṇaṃ bandhitvā tena saññāṇena āgantvā nhāyanti ceva pivanti ca, yadā pana tesaṃ abhiṇhasañcārena āgatāgatapadaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tadā saññāṇena kiccaṃ na hoti, icchiticchitakkhaṇe gantvā nhāyanti ceva pivanti ca; evameva pubbabhāge ‘kesā lomā’ti paṇṇattivasena manasikaroto paṭikkūlabhāvo pākaṭo hoti. Atha ‘kesā lomā’ti paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamitvā paṭikkūlabhāveyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ.
所谓“渐次舍离”,就是当某个部位没有现起时,就把它一个一个地舍掉,以这样的方式作意。初学者作意“头发”时,作意的心会一直走到最后那个部位“尿”,然后停在那里;作意“尿”时,作意的心又会一直走到最初那个部位“头发”,然后停在那里。这样作意时,有些部位会现起,有些部位不会现起。这时,对那些已经现起的部位,先逐个用功,直到有两个部位同时现起时,其中有一个会显得更清楚。对于这样现起的那个部位,就反复作意,直到生起安止定。巴利
‘Anupubbamuñcanato’ti yo yo koṭṭhāso na upaṭṭhāti, taṃ taṃ muñcantena anupubbamuñcanato manasikātabbaṃ. Ādikammikassa hi ‘kesā’ti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā ‘mutta’nti imaṃ pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhati. ‘Mutta’nti ca manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā ‘kesā’ti imaṃ ādikoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhati. Athassa manasikaroto keci koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti, keci na upaṭṭhahanti. Tena ye ye upaṭṭhahanti tesu tesu tāva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ, yāva dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu tesampi eko suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhahati. Evaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ pana tameva punappunaṃ manasikarontena appanā uppādetabbā.
这里有一个譬喻:就像有个猎人想抓住住在三十二棵棕榈树组成的棕榈林里的猴子,他先朝最前面那棵棕榈树的叶子射了一箭,然后喊了一声;那只猴子就一棵接一棵地跳过去,一直跳到最边上那棵棕榈树;到了那里,猎人又照样做一次,猴子又按同样的路线回到最前面那棵树。它就这样一次又一次地按顺序来回跳,每次听到喊声就跳起来,最后渐渐停在一棵棕榈树上,紧紧抓住那棵树正中间还没展开的嫩棕叶尖,即使被箭射中也不再跳起来。应当知道,修习达到这种程度时,也是同样的情形。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi dvattiṃsatālake tālavane vasantaṃ makkaṭaṃ gahetukāmo luddo ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇaṃ sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiṃ kareyya; atha so makkaṭo paṭipāṭiyā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ tāle patitvā pariyantatālameva gaccheyya; tatthapi gantvā luddena tatheva kate puna teneva nayena āditālaṃ āgaccheyya; so evaṃ punappunaṃ paṭipāṭiyā gacchanto ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāneyeva uṭṭhahitvā puna anukkamena ekasmiṃ tāle nipatitvā tassa vemajjhe makuḷatālapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā vijjhiyamānopi na uṭṭhaheyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这里把譬喻和所喻对应起来看:就像棕榈林里有三十二棵棕榈树,这个身体里也有三十二个部分;心就像猴子;瑜伽行者就像猎人。猴子住在有三十二棵棕榈树的棕榈林里,到处游荡,同样,瑜伽行者的心也以三十二身分为所缘,在其中游走。猎人先射中站在最前面那棵棕榈树的叶子,然后喊一声,猴子就从一棵树跳到另一棵树,一直跑到最边上的那棵棕榈树;同样,瑜伽行者一开始作意“头发”时,心依次推进,最后停在最后一个部分上;再往回走时,也是同样的道理。猴子一次又一次按顺序跳来跳去,每次听到喊声就在那个地方跳起来;同样,反复作意时,有些部分现起,有些部分不现起,就把不现起的放掉,只对现起的部分继续用功。到最后,猴子渐渐落在一棵棕榈树上,紧紧抓住树中间那根嫩棕叶的尖刺,即使被射中也不起来;同样,最后在两个现起的部分中,哪个现得更清楚,就对它反复作意,从而生起安止。巴利
Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – yathā hi tālavane dvattiṃsatālā, evaṃ imasmiṃ kāye dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā; makkaṭo viya cittaṃ; luddo viya yogāvacaro; makkaṭassa dvattiṃsatālake tālavane nivāso viya yogino cittassa dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsake kāye ārammaṇavasena anusaṃcaraṇaṃ; luddena ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇaṃ sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiyā katāya makkaṭassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ tāle patitvā pariyantatālagamanaṃ viya yogino ‘kesā’ti manasikāre āraddhe paṭipāṭiyā gantvā pariyosānakoṭṭhāse eva cittassa saṇṭhānaṃ; puna paccāgamanepi eseva nayo; punappunaṃ paṭipāṭiyā gacchamānassa makkaṭassa ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāne uṭṭhānaṃ viya punappunaṃ manasikaroto kesuci kesuci upaṭṭhitesu anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu parikammakaraṇaṃ; anukkamena ekasmiṃ tāle nipatitvā tassa vemajjhe makuḷatālapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā vijjhiyamānassāpi anuṭṭhānaṃ viya avasāne dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu yo suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhāti tameva punappunaṃ manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanaṃ.
还有一个譬喻:就像一位常行乞食的比丘,依靠一个有三十二户人家的村庄住下来。第一天,他在第一家就得到两勺食物,便把后面那一家放掉;第二天得到三勺,便把后面两家放掉;第三天一开始就得到满满一钵,于是走到食堂去享用。应当这样理解这个对应关系:三十二户人家的村庄,好比三十二身分;常行乞食的比丘,好比瑜伽行者;他依靠那个村庄而住,好比瑜伽行者在三十二身分上作准备工作;第一天得到两勺食物而放掉后面一家,第二天得到三勺而放掉后面两家,好比作意者一次又一次作意时,对那些不现起的身分就放掉,对那些现起的身分就作准备工作,一直到在两个部分上作准备;第三天一开始就得到满钵,坐在食堂里享用,好比在两个部分中,对那个现起得更清楚的部分反复作意,从而生起安止。巴利
Aparāpi upamā – yathā nāma piṇḍapātiko bhikkhu dvattiṃsakulaṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vasanto paṭhamagehe eva dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekaṃ vissajjeyya; punadivase tisso labhitvā parato dve vissajjeyya; tatiyadivase ādimhiyeva pattapūraṃ labhitvā āsanasālaṃ gantvā paribhuñjeyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dvattiṃsakulagāmo viya hi dvattiṃsākāro; piṇḍapātiko viya yogāvacaro; tassa taṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vāso viya yogino dvattiṃsākāre parikammakaraṇaṃ; paṭhamagehe dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekissā vissajjanaṃ viya dutiyadivase tisso labhitvā parato dvinnaṃ vissajjanaṃ viya ca manasikaroto manasikaroto anupaṭṭhahante anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu upaṭṭhitesu yāva koṭṭhāsadvaye parikammakaraṇaṃ; tatiyadivase ādimhiyeva pattapūraṃ labhitvā āsanasālāyaṃ nisīditvā paribhogo viya dvīsu yo suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhahati tameva punappunaṃ manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanaṃ.
所谓“安止”,是从安止这一部分来说的。应当知道,在头发等每一个部分中,安止都能生起,这就是这里的意思。巴利
‘Appanāto’ti appanākoṭṭhāsato. Kesādīsu ekekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse appanā hotīti veditabbāti ayamettha adhippāyo.
“三种经”指的是《增上心经》《清凉经》《觉支善巧经》。应当知道,这三部经是为了说明如何把精进与定结合起来。这就是这里的用意。其中——巴利
‘Tayo ca suttantā’ti adhicittaṃ, sītibhāvo, bojjhaṅgakosallanti ime tayo suttantā vīriyasamādhiyojanatthaṃ veditabbāti ayamettha adhippāyo. Tattha –
比丘们,致力于增上心的比丘,应当适时作意三种相:适时作意定相,适时作意策励相,适时作意舍相。比丘们,如果致力于增上心的比丘一味只作意定相,他的心就可能会陷于懈怠。比丘们,如果致力于增上心的比丘一味只作意策励相,他的心就可能会陷于掉举。比丘们,如果致力于增上心的比丘一味只作意舍相,他的心就可能无法为了漏尽而正确地得定。比丘们,当致力于增上心的比丘适时作意定相、策励相、舍相时,他的心就会变得柔软、堪任、光洁而不脆弱,能够为了漏尽而正确地得定。巴利
‘‘Adhicittamanuyuttena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tīṇi nimittāni kālena kālaṃ manasikātabbāni…kālena kālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ, kālena kālaṃ paggahanimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ, kālena kālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ samādhinimittaṃyeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ paggahanimittaṃyeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ uddhaccāya saṃvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ upekkhānimittaṃyeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ na sammāsamādhiyeyya āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu kālena kālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ, paggahanimittaṃ, upekkhānimittaṃ manasikaroti, taṃ hoti cittaṃ mudu ca kammaniyañca pabhassarañca, na ca pabhaṅgu, sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya.
比丘们,就像金匠或金匠的徒弟,他搭好炉子,搭好炉子后涂抹炉口,涂抹炉口后用钳子夹起黄金,放进炉口里。放进去之后,他时不时吹火,时不时洒水,时不时只是旁观。比丘们,如果金匠或金匠的徒弟只是一直吹那块黄金,那块黄金就可能被烧坏。比丘们,如果金匠或金匠的徒弟只是一直洒水,那块黄金就可能冷却。比丘们,如果金匠或金匠的徒弟只是一直旁观,那块黄金就可能无法正确地成熟。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā ukkaṃ bandhati, ukkaṃ bandhitvā ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpeti, ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpetvā saṇḍāsena jātarūpaṃ gahetvā ukkāmukhe pakkhipeyya, ukkāmukhe pakkhipitvā kālena kālaṃ abhidhamati, kālena kālaṃ udakena paripphoseti, kālena kālaṃ ajjhupekkhati . Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ abhidhameyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ ḍaheyya. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ udakena paripphoseyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ nibbāyeyya. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ ajjhupekkheyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ na sammā paripākaṃ gaccheyya.
比丘们,当金匠或金匠的徒弟时不时地吹炼那块黄金,时不时地用水洒它,时不时地在一旁旁观时,那块黄金就会变得柔软、好用、明亮,而且不会脆裂,能很好地用来加工。无论他想把它做成什么样的装饰品——不管是带子、耳环、项链还是金花环——它都能满足那个用途。巴利
‘‘Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ kālena kālaṃ abhidhamati, kālena kālaṃ udakena paripphoseti, kālena kālaṃ ajjhupekkhati, taṃ hoti jātarūpaṃ mudu ca kammaniyañca pabhassarañca, na ca pabhaṅgu, sammā upeti kammāya; yassā yassā ca piḷandhanavikatiyā ākaṅkhati – yadi paṭṭikāya yadi kuṇḍalāya yadi gīveyyakāya yadi suvaṇṇamālāya, tañcassa atthaṃ anubhoti.
就像这样,比丘们,一个致力于增上心的人……为了诸漏的灭尽而正确地得定;无论他把心朝向哪一种应当以神通证得的法,要在那里以神通证得,他就在那一点上、那一个所缘上,都能获得亲自作证的能力。这部经应当理解为《增上心经》。巴利
‘‘Evameva kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyuttena…pe… sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya; yassa yassa ca abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyassa dhammassa cittaṃ abhininnāmeti abhiññā sacchikiriyāya, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane’’ti (a. ni. 3.103) idaṃ suttaṃ adhicittanti veditabbaṃ.
比丘们,具备六种法的比丘,能够证得无上的清凉。是哪六种呢?比丘们,在这里,比丘在心应当被抑制的时候抑制心,在心应当被策励的时候策励心,在心应当被令欢喜的时候令心欢喜,在心应当被旁观舍置的时候旁观舍置心,并且他志向殊胜、乐于涅槃。比丘们,具备这六种法的比丘,能够证得无上的清凉。应当知道这部经(《增支部》6.85)名为《清凉经》。巴利
‘‘Chahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātuṃ. Katamehi chahi? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsitabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, paṇītādhimuttiko ca hoti nibbānābhirato ca. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, chahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātu’’nti (a. ni. 6.85) idaṃ suttaṃ sītibhāvoti veditabbaṃ.
至于觉支的善巧,在《相应部·大品·觉支相应》中已经说到:“比丘们,同样地,当心沉滞时,那时候并不是修习轻安觉支的时机。”巴利
Bojjhaṅgakosallaṃ pana ‘‘evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, akālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234) saṃyuttamahāvagge bojjhaṅgasaṃyutte āgatameva.
这样,把七种取相善巧好好掌握之后,再把十种作意善巧妥善确定下来,这位瑜伽行者就应当依据这两种善巧,把业处好好地学习。不过,如果他和老师住在同一座寺院里就觉得方便安稳,那就不必请老师这样详细地讲解,而应一边精勤修习业处,一边在获得殊胜进展后,再一步步向上请教。若是想住到别处去,就应按前面所说的方法,请老师详细讲解,反复温习,断除一切疑难之处,舍弃不适合修习业处的住处,住到远离大寺等十八种过失的合适精舍里,断除细微的障碍。其中,若这个人是贪行者,因为贪必须断除,所以应当先对厌恶作意做预备修习。巴利
Iti idaṃ sattavidhaṃ uggahakosallaṃ suggahitaṃ katvā imañca dasavidhaṃ manasikārakosallaṃ suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā tena yoginā ubhayakosallavasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ sādhukaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Sace panassa ācariyena saddhiṃ ekavihāreyeva phāsu hoti, evaṃ vitthārena akathāpetvā kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjantena visesaṃ labhitvā uparūpari kathāpetabbaṃ. Aññattha vasitukāmena yathāvuttena vidhinā vitthārato kathāpetvā punappunaṃ parivattetvā sabbaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā kammaṭṭhānabhāvanāya ananurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ pahāya mahāvāsatādiaṭṭhārasadosavajjite anurūpe vihāre viharantena khuddakapalibodhupacchedaṃ katvā yo tāva rāgacarito hoti, tena yasmā rāgo pahātabbo, tasmā paṭikkūlamanasikāre parikammaṃ kātabbaṃ.
正在修习的人,首先要从头发上取相。怎么取呢?拔下一根或两根头发,放在手掌上,先确定它的颜色。在头发被拔断的地方观察也可以;放在水钵或粥钵里观察也可以。看到是黑色的时候,就作意“黑”;看到是白色的时候,就作意“白”。如果是杂色,就按其中占主导的颜色来作意。就像对头发一样,对皮肤等整个五法,也应当看到之后就取相。这样取相之后,对一切部分,按颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限来确定,再按颜色、形状、气味、依处、处所这五种方式,确定为厌恶。巴利
Karontena pana kesesu tāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ vā dve vā kese luñcitvā hatthatale ṭhapetvā vaṇṇo tāva vavatthapetabbo. Chinnaṭṭhānepi kese oloketuṃ vaṭṭati; udakapatte vā yāgupatte vā oloketumpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Kāḷakakāle disvā kāḷakāti manasikātabbā; setakāle setāti. Missakakāle pana ussadavasena manasikātabbā honti. Yathā ca kesesu, evaṃ sakalepi tacapañcake disvāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ nimittaṃ gahetvā sabbakoṭṭhāsesu vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhaāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato vavatthapetabbā.
这里,对一切部分的依次解说是:先说头发,按本来颜色是黑色的,像阿达利咤果的颜色;按形状是长圆的,像杵的形状;按方位,是从上方生出的;按处所,两侧以耳尖为界,前面以额际为界,后面以颈窝为界。覆盖头骨的湿皮,就是头发所在的处所。按界限来说,头发向下穿入头皮约一粒谷那么深而安住,下方以自己根部的底端为界,上方以虚空为界,横向以彼此为界。没有两根头发同在一处——这是同分界限。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu anupubbakathā – kesā tāva pakativaṇṇena kāḷakā addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā, saṇṭhānato dīghavaṭṭalikā tulādaṇḍasaṇṭhānā, disato uparimadisāya jātā, okāsato ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi, purato nalāṭantena, pacchato galavāṭakena paricchinnā. Sīsakaṭāhaveṭhanaṃ allacammaṃ kesānaṃ okāso. Paricchedato kesā sīsaveṭhanacamme vīhaggamattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Dve kesā ekato natthīti ayaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo.
“头发不是体毛,体毛不是头发”——像这样,不与其余三十一部分混杂、名为“头发”的单独部分,就是异分界限。这是依颜色等对头发的确定。巴利
‘Kesā na lomā, lomā na kesā’ti evaṃ avasesehi ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsehi amissīkatā kesā nāma pāṭiyekko koṭṭhāsoti ayaṃ visabhāgaparicchedo. Idaṃ kesānaṃ vaṇṇādito vavatthāpanaṃ.
不过,这是依颜色等五个方面,把头发确定为可厌的:所谓头发,不论从颜色、形状、气味、来源还是所处位置来看,都是可厌的。即使是在令人喜欢的粥钵或饭钵里,只要看到一点像头发颜色的东西,人们就会厌恶地说:“这里面混了头发,拿走!”这样,头发从颜色上就是可厌的。夜里吃饭时,如果触碰到了像铁钩或蚊网那样形状的头发,也同样会厌恶。这样,头发从形状上就是可厌的。巴利
Idaṃ pana tesaṃ vaṇṇādivasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato vavatthāpanaṃ – kesā ca nāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikkūlā, saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopi paṭikkūlā. Manuññepi hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā ‘kesamissakamidaṃ, haratha na’nti jigucchanti. Evaṃ kesā vaṇṇato paṭikkūlā. Rattiṃ bhuñjantāpi kesasaṇṭhānaṃ akkavākaṃ vā makacivākaṃ vā chupitvāpi tatheva jigucchanti. Evaṃ saṇṭhānato paṭikkūlā.
没有涂油、熏花、烟熏等修饰的头发,气味极其难闻;比扔进火里的头发还要更难闻。头发从颜色和形状来看,也许还不算难看,但闻起来就实在让人受不了。就像婴儿的粪便,颜色像姜黄,形状也像姜黄团;又像扔在垃圾堆里、膨胀发黑腐烂的狗尸,颜色像多罗果,形状像翻倒的小鼓,牙齿像素馨花蕾——这两样东西从颜色和形状看也许不恶心,但闻起来就实在恶心。同样,头发从颜色和形状看也许不恶心,但闻起来就实在恶心。巴利
Telamakkhanapupphadhūmādisaṅkhāravirahitānañca kesānaṃ gandho paramajeguccho hoti, tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittānaṃ. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikkūlāpi siyuṃ, gandhena pana paṭikkūlāyeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārassa vaccaṃ vaṇṇato haḷiddivaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānatopi haliddipiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ; saṅkhāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīraṃ vaṇṇato tālapakkavaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ, dāṭhāpissa sumanamakuḷasadisāti ubhayampi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikkūlaṃ, gandhena pana paṭikkūlameva; evaṃ kesāpi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikkūlā, gandhena pana paṭikkūlā evāti.
再打个比方:长在不干净地方的菜叶,是靠村庄的污水滋养出来的,城里人看了就觉得恶心,根本不想吃。同样,头发是从脓、血、尿、粪、胆汁、痰这些东西里生出来的,所以特别恶心——这就是从“来源”上说头发令人厌嫌。
再说,这些所谓的头发,就像粪堆上冒出来的蘑菇一样,是长在三十一种身体成分这堆东西里面的。又像坟场、垃圾堆等地方长出来的菜,或者像沟渠里长出来的莲花、睡莲等花一样,因为长在不干净的地方,所以极其恶心——这就是从“处所”上说头发令人厌嫌。巴利
Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānaṃ jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evaṃ kesāpi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā atijegucchāti idaṃ nesaṃ ‘āsayato’ pāṭikulyaṃ. Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇikaṃ viya ekattiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā. Te susānasaṅkāraṭṭhānādīsu jātasākaṃ viya, parikhādīsu jātakamalakuvalayādipupphaṃ viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchāti idaṃ tesaṃ ‘okāsato’ pāṭikkūlyaṃ.
就像对头发那样,对一切身体部分也都应当依颜色、形状、气味、生处、处所这五个方面来确定它们的可厌性。而一切身体部分还应各别依颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限来加以确定。巴利
Yathā ca kesānaṃ, evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlatā vavatthapetabbā. Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena pana sabbepi visuṃ visuṃ vavatthapetabbā.
在这里,先说体毛:从颜色来看,不像头发那样纯黑,而是黑褐色的;从形状来看,像棕榈树根部向下弯垂的样子;从方位来看,生于两侧;从处所来看,除了头发扎根的地方和手脚掌之外,大多数都长在覆盖身体其余部分的皮肤上;从界限来看,向下以自身根部扎入皮肤,深度只有一粒虱卵那么大,向上以虚空为界,横向则彼此为界。没有两根体毛是长在一起的。这是它们共同的特征界限。而不同的特征界限,则和头发类似。巴利
Tattha lomā tāva pakativaṇṇato na kesā viya asambhinnakāḷakā, kāḷapiṅgalā pana honti; saṇṭhānato onataggatālamūlasaṇṭhānā; disato dvīsu disāsu jātā; okāsato ṭhapetvā kesānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsañca hatthapādatalāni ca yebhuyyena avasesasarīraveṭhanacamme jātā; paricchedato sarīraveṭhanacamme likkhāmattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Dve lomā ekato natthi. Ayaṃ tesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
“爪”是二十片爪板的名称。它们全都是白色的;形状像鱼鳞;从方位来说,脚爪生在下方,手爪生在上方,所以是生在两个方向;从所处位置来说,立在手指和脚趾的背面顶端;从界限来说,两侧以指端和趾端的肉为界,内侧以指背和趾背的肉为界,外侧和顶端以虚空为界,横向则彼此为界。没有两片爪是连在一起的。这是它们的同分界限。而异分界限则和头发一样。巴利
Nakhāti vīsatiyā nakhapaṭṭānaṃ nāmaṃ. Te sabbepi vaṇṇato setā; saṇṭhānato macchasakalikasaṇṭhānā; disato pādanakhā heṭṭhimadisāya jātā, hatthanakhā uparimadisāyāti dvīsu disāsu jātā; okāsato aṅgulīnaṃ aggapiṭṭhesu patiṭṭhitā; paricchedato dvīsu disāsu aṅgulikoṭimaṃsehi, anto aṅgulipiṭṭhimaṃsena, bahi ceva agge ca ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Dve nakhā ekato natthi. Ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
牙是指牙齿完整的人的三十二颗牙齿。它们从颜色上说都是白的;从形状上说有很多种。先看下排牙齿:中间四颗,形状像依次摆在泥团上的葫芦籽。这四颗两边各有一颗,单根单尖,形状像茉莉花蕾。再往外各有一颗,双根双尖,形状像车棚的支柱。再往外各有两颗,三根三尖。再往外各有两颗,四根四尖。上排牙齿也是这样。从方位上说,它们生在上方;从所处位置说,安立在两块腭骨上;从界限上说,向下以自己根部安立在腭骨上,向上以虚空为界,横向彼此为界。没有两颗牙是连在一起的。这是它们同类之间的界限。不同类之间的界限,则和头发一样。巴利
Dantāti paripuṇṇadantassa dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhikāni. Tepi vaṇṇato setā; saṇṭhānato anekasaṇṭhānā. Tesañhi heṭṭhimāya tāva dantapāḷiyā majjhe cattāro dantā mattikāpiṇḍe paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitaalābubījasaṇṭhānā. Tesaṃ ubhosu passesu ekeko ekamūlako ekakoṭiko mallikamakuḷasaṇṭhāno. Tato ekeko dvimūlako dvikoṭiko yānakaupatthambhanikasaṇṭhāno. Tato dve dve timūlā tikoṭikā. Tato dve dve catumūlā catukoṭikāti. Uparimapāḷiyāpi eseva nayo . Disato uparimadisāya jātā. Okāsato dvīsu hanukaṭṭhikesu patiṭṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā hanukaṭṭhike patiṭṭhitena attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Dve dantā ekato natthi. Ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
所谓“皮”,是指包裹整个身体的那层皮肤。在它上面,有黑、暗、黄等颜色的,叫做“薄皮”;这层薄皮如果从全身收拢起来,只有枣核那么大。而“皮”本身的颜色是白色的。当薄皮被火焰烧灼、打击等破坏之后,皮这种白色就会显露出来。从形状来说,皮和身体的形状是一样的。这里只是简略地说。巴利
Tacoti sakalasarīraṃ veṭhetvā ṭhitacammaṃ. Tassa upari kāḷasāmapītādivaṇṇā chavi nāma, yā sakalasarīratopi saṅkaḍḍhiyamānā badaraṭṭhimattā hoti. Taco pana vaṇṇato setoyeva. So cassa setabhāvo aggijālābhighātapaharaṇapahārādīhi viddhaṃsitāya chaviyā pākaṭo hoti. Saṇṭhānato sarīrasaṇṭhānova hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo.
如果详细说明:脚趾的皮像蚕茧的形状;脚背的皮像束带鞋的形状;小腿的皮像包饭的棕榈叶袋的形状;大腿的皮像装满米的长袋的形状;臀部的皮像装满水的布滤器的形状;背部的皮像蒙在板上的皮张的形状;腹部的皮像蒙在维那琴琴身上的皮张的形状;胸部的皮大多数呈四方形;两臂的皮像蒙在箭囊上的皮张的形状;手背的皮像剃刀套的形状,或者像梳袋的形状;手指的皮像钥匙套的形状;颈部的皮像颈套的形状;面部的皮布满孔穴,像虫巢的形状;头部的皮像钵袋的形状。巴利
Vitthārato pana pādaṅgulittaco kosakārakakosasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhipādattaco puṭabandhaupāhanasaṇṭhāno. Jaṅghattaco bhattapuṭakatālapaṇṇasaṇṭhāno. Ūruttaco taṇḍulabharitadīghatthavikasaṇṭhāno. Ānisadattaco udakapūritapaṭaparissāvanasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhittaco phalakonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Kucchittaco vīṇādoṇikonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Urattaco yebhuyyena caturassasaṇṭhāno. Ubhayabāhuttaco tūṇīronaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhihatthattaco khurakosakasaṇṭhāno, phaṇakatthavikasaṇṭhāno vā. Hatthaṅgulittaco kuñcikākosakasaṇṭhāno. Gīvattaco galakañcukasaṇṭhāno. Mukhattaco chiddāvacchiddo kīṭakulāvakasaṇṭhāno. Sīsattaco pattatthavikasaṇṭhānoti.
修取皮业处的瑜伽行者,应当从上唇开始,把智导向面部上方,首先确定覆盖在面部的皮;然后是额骨的皮;接着,就像把手伸进袋子里,在袋子和袋中装的钵之间那样,把智导入头骨和头皮之间,分离皮与骨连成一体的状态,确定头部的皮;然后是肩部的皮;接着顺向和逆向地确定右手的皮;再用同样的方法确定左手的皮;然后是背部的皮;逐一确定之后,顺向和逆向地确定右脚的皮;再用同样的方法确定左脚的皮;然后依次确定膀胱、腹、心、颈的皮;接着在颈皮之后确定下颚的皮,一直到下唇为止,就此结束。这样,逐一取认粗大者时,微细的部分也会变得清楚。巴利
Tacapariggaṇhakena ca yogāvacarena uttaroṭṭhato paṭṭhāya upari mukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ pesetvā paṭhamaṃ tāva mukhaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitacammaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato nalāṭaṭṭhicammaṃ. Tato thavikāya pakkhittapattassa ca thavikāya ca antarena hatthamiva sīsaṭṭhikassa ca sīsacammassa ca antarena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā aṭṭhikena saddhiṃ cammassa ekābaddhabhāvaṃ viyojentena sīsacammaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato khandhacammaṃ. Tato anulomena paṭilomena ca dakkhiṇahatthacammaṃ. Atha teneva nayena vāmahatthacammaṃ. Tato piṭṭhicammaṃ. Taṃ taṃ vavatthapetvā anulomena ca paṭilomena ca dakkhiṇapādacammaṃ. Atha teneva nayena vāmapādacammaṃ. Tato anukkameneva vatthiudarahadayagīvacammāni vavatthapetabbāni. Atha gīvācammānantaraṃ heṭṭhimahanucammaṃ vavatthapetvā adharoṭṭhapariyosānaṃ pāpetvā niṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Evaṃ oḷārikoḷārikaṃ pariggaṇhantassa sukhumampi pākaṭaṃ hoti.
从方位来说,它生在两侧。从所处位置来说,它覆盖整个身体而存在。从界限来说,下面以所依的底面为界,上面以虚空为界。这是它的同类界限;而不同类界限,则和头发一样。巴利
Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sakalasarīraṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhito. Paricchedato heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitatalena, upari ākāsena paricchinno. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
肉有九百块肉片。这一切肉从颜色来说都是红色,像甄叔迦花一样;从形状来说,小腿肚的肉像棕榈叶包成的饭团形状,大腿的肉像小磨石杵的形状,臀部的肉像灶角的形状,背部的肉像糖片层叠的形状,两肋的肉像薄泥涂在窖内壁上的形状,乳房的肉像揉捏后投下的泥团形状,两臂的肉像剥了皮的大老鼠叠成两层放置的形状。这样粗粗地观察取相时,微细的也会变得明显。从方位来说,生于两侧。从处所来说,依附三百多块骨而住。从界限来说,下面以安立在骨聚上的底面为界,上面以皮为界,横向以彼此为界。这是它的同分界限;异分界限则和头发相似。巴利
Maṃsanti nava maṃsapesisatāni. Taṃ sabbampi vaṇṇato rattaṃ kiṃsukapupphasadisaṃ; saṇṭhānato jaṅghapiṇḍikamaṃsaṃ tālapaṇṇapuṭabhattasaṇṭhānaṃ, ūrumaṃsaṃ nisadapotakasaṇṭhānaṃ, ānisadamaṃsaṃ uddhanakoṭisaṇṭhānaṃ, piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ tālaguḷapaṭalasaṇṭhānaṃ, phāsukadvayamaṃsaṃ potthalikāya kucchiyaṃ tanumattikālepanasaṇṭhānaṃ, thanamaṃsaṃ vaṭṭetvā avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ, bāhudvayamaṃsaṃ diguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapitaniccammamahāmūsikasaṇṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ oḷārikoḷārikaṃ maṃsaṃ pariggaṇhantassa sukhumampi pākaṭaṃ hoti. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato sādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni anulimpetvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato heṭṭhā aṭṭhisaṅghāte patiṭṭhitatalena, upari tacena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
所谓“筋”,有九百条。从颜色来看,所有筋都是白色的;从形状来看,则各有不同形状。其中,从颈部上方开始,有五条大筋缠绕身体,从心脏前侧延伸下来;五条从后侧下来;五条从右侧下来;五条从左侧下来。缠绕右手时,也是手的前侧五条、后侧五条;缠绕左手时也一样。缠绕右脚时,也是脚的前侧五条、后侧五条;缠绕左脚时也一样。这样,名为“持身者”的六十条大筋缠绕身体并延伸下来,它们也被称为“腱”。这些全都呈百合花蕾的形状。巴利
‘Nhārū’ti nava nhārusatāni. Vaṇṇato sabbepi nhārū setā; saṇṭhānato nānāsaṇṭhānā. Etesu hi gīvāya uparibhāgato paṭṭhāya pañca mahānhārū sarīraṃ vinaddhamānā hadayassa purimapassena otiṇṇā, pañca pacchimapassena, pañca dakkhiṇapassena, pañca vāmapassena, dakkhiṇahatthaṃ vinaddhamānāpi hatthassa purimapassena pañca, pacchimapassena pañca, tathā vāmahatthaṃ vinaddhamānāpi. Dakkhiṇapādaṃ vinaddhamānāpi pādassa purimapassena pañca, pacchimapassena pañca, tathā vāmapādaṃ vinaddhamānāpīti. Evaṃ sarīradhārakā nāma saṭṭhi mahānhārū kāyaṃ vinaddhamānā otiṇṇā, ye kaṇḍarātipi vuccanti. Te sabbepi kandalamakuḷasaṇṭhānā.
另外一些筋遍布在各个部位,比那些更细,形状像线。还有一些比这些更细,形状像腐烂的藤蔓。还有一些比这些更细,形状像大琵琶的弦。另一些则像粗线。手背和脚背上的筋,形状像鸟爪。头部的筋,形状像小孩头上的网。背部的筋,像在阳光下铺开的湿网。其余随着身体各部位分布的筋,在身体里就像贴身穿着的网衣。从方位来说,它们生在两个方向。从所处位置来说,它们绑住全身的骨头而安住。从界限来说,下方以三百块骨头上方所立的平面为界,上方以触及肌肉和皮肤而安住的地方为界,横向则彼此之间相互为界。这是它们的同类界限。而不同类的界限,则和头发一样。巴利
Aññe pana taṃ taṃ padesaṃ ajjhottharitvā ṭhitā tato sukhumatarā suttarajjukasaṇṭhānā. Aññe tato sukhumatarā pūtilatāsaṇṭhānā. Aññe tato sukhumatarā mahāvīṇātantisaṇṭhānā. Aññe thūlasuttakasaṇṭhānā. Hatthapādapiṭṭhiyaṃ nhārū sakuṇapādasaṇṭhānā. Sīsanhārū dārakānaṃ sīsajālakasaṇṭhānā. Piṭṭhinhārū ātape pasāritaallajālasaṇṭhānā. Avasesā taṃtaṃaṅgapaccaṅgānugatā nhārū sarīre paṭimukkajālakañcukasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato sakalasarīre aṭṭhīni ābandhitvā ṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā tiṇṇaṃ aṭṭhisatānaṃ upari patiṭṭhitatalehi, upari maṃsacammāni āhacca ṭhitapadesehi, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
所谓骨,就是除了三十二颗牙齿骨之外,剩下的有:六十四块手骨、六十四块脚骨、六十四块依附于肉的柔软骨、两块脚跟骨,每只脚各有两块踝骨,两块小腿骨、两块膝盖骨、两块大腿骨、两块髋骨、十八块脊椎骨、二十四块肋骨、十四块胸骨、一块心骨、两块锁骨、两块肩胛骨、两块上臂骨、各两块前臂骨、七块颈骨、两块颚骨、一块鼻骨、两块眼骨、两块耳骨、一块额骨、一块头骨、九块头盖骨。这样总共大约有三百块骨。巴利
Aṭṭhīti ṭhapetvā dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhīni avasesāni catusaṭṭhi hatthaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi pādaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi maṃsanissitāni muduaṭṭhīni, dve paṇhikaṭṭhīni, ekekasmiṃ pāde dve gopphakaṭṭhīni, dve jaṅghaṭṭhīni, dve jaṇṇukaṭṭhīni, dve ūruṭṭhīni, dve kaṭiṭṭhīni, aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni, catuvīsati phāsukaṭṭhīni, cuddasa uraṭṭhīni, ekaṃ hadayaṭṭhi, dve akkhakaṭṭhīni, dve koṭṭhaṭṭhīni, dve bāhaṭṭhīni, dve dve aggabāhaṭṭhīni, satta gīvaṭṭhīni, dve hanukaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ nāsikaṭṭhi, dve akkhiṭṭhīni, dve kaṇṇaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ nalāṭaṭṭhi, ekaṃ muddhaṭṭhi, nava sīsakapālaṭṭhīnīti evaṃ timattāni aṭṭhisatāni.
这些骨从颜色上看全都是白色的,形状则各不相同。其中,脚趾尖的骨节像波罗蜜种子;紧接着的中段骨节像波罗蜜核;根部骨节像鼓;脚背的骨像捣碎的球茎块根堆;脚跟骨像系着绳子的游戏球;踝骨像单核的棕榈果核;胫骨在踝骨上的连接处,像没去皮的生姜块茎;小胫骨像弓杆,大胫骨像萎蛇的背;膝盖骨像一侧消减的泡沫团。巴利
Tāni sabbānipi vaṇṇato setāni, saṇṭhānato nānāsaṇṭhānāni. Tattha hi aggapādaṅguliṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni. Tadanantarāni majjhapabbaṭṭhīni panasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīni koṭṭhitakandalakandarāsisaṇṭhānāni. Paṇhikaṭṭhi ekaṭṭhitālaphalabījasaṇṭhānaṃ. Gopphakaṭṭhīni bandhakīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānāni. Jaṅghaṭṭhīnaṃ gopphakaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ anapanītatacasindikaḷīrasaṇṭhānaṃ. Khuddakajaṅghaṭṭhikaṃ dhanukadaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ, mahantaṃ milātasappapiṭṭhisaṇṭhānaṃ. Jaṇṇukaṭṭhi ekato parikkhīṇapheṇakasaṇṭhānaṃ.
其中,踝骨在胫骨上的支撑处,形状像特别尖的牛角。股骨像粗粗削成的斧柄。它在髋骨上的连接处,形状像游戏用的圆球。因此,髋骨上的连接处,形状像切掉顶尖的大紫矿果。两块髋骨连成一体时,形状像陶工的灶;各自分开时,形状像铁匠的锤柄。位于末端的尾闾骨,把它向下翻转来看,形状像蛇头巾帽,上面有七个孔。脊椎骨从内侧看,像一层层往上叠放的铅板卷;从外侧看,像圆筒链。它们之间有两三个像锯齿一样的棘突。二十四根肋骨中,不完整的呈不完整的镰刀形,完整的呈完整的镰刀形。所有肋骨都像白鸡展开翅膀的形状。巴利
Tattha jaṅghaṭṭhikassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikhiṇaggagosiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ūruṭṭhi duttacchitavāsipharasudaṇḍakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tassa kaṭiṭṭhimhi patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ kīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tena kaṭiṭṭhino patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ aggacchinnamahāpunnāgaphalasaṇṭhānaṃ. Kaṭiṭṭhīni dvepi ekābaddhāni hutvā kumbhakārakauddhanasaṇṭhānāni, pāṭiyekkaṃ kammārakūṭayottakasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭiyaṃ ṭhitaānisadaṭṭhi adhomukhaṃ katvā gahitasappaphaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ sattasu ṭhānesu chiddāvachiddaṃ. Piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni abbhantarato uparūpari ṭhapitasīsakapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni, bāhirato vaṭṭanāvaḷisaṇṭhānāni. Tesaṃ antarantarā kakacadantasadisā dve tayo kaṇṭakā honti. Catuvīsatiyā phāsukaṭṭhīsu aparipuṇṇāni aparipuṇṇāsitasaṇṭhānāni, paripuṇṇāni paripuṇṇāsitasaṇṭhānāni. Sabbānipi odātakukkuṭassa pasāritapakkhasaṇṭhānāni.
十四块胸骨,形状像老旧车篷骨架的笼子。心骨,形状像汤匙的勺面。锁骨,形状像小铜斧的柄。肩胛骨,形状像一侧磨薄了的锡兰锄头。臂骨,形状像镜柄。前臂骨,形状像一对棕榈球茎。腕骨,形状像把铅板卷合拢在一起放着。手背骨,形状像捣碎的球茎块根堆。手指的根节骨,形状像鼓;中节骨,形状像不完整的波罗蜜核;尖节骨,形状像苦楝子。七块颈骨,像用木棍穿起来依次排好的竹笋环。下颚骨,形状像铁匠的铁锤柄;上颚骨,形状像刮削刀。巴利
Cuddasa uraṭṭhīni jiṇṇasandamānikapañjarasaṇṭhānāni. Hadayaṭṭhi dabbiphaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ. Akkhakaṭṭhīni khuddakalohavāsidaṇḍasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭṭhaṭṭhīni ekato parikkhīṇasīhaḷakudālasaṇṭhānāni. Bāhuṭṭhīni ādāsadaṇḍakasaṇṭhānāni. Aggabāhuṭṭhīni yamakatālakandasaṇṭhānāni. Maṇibandhaṭṭhīni ekato allīyāpetvā ṭhapitasīsakapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhihatthaṭṭhīni koṭṭitakandalakandarāsisaṇṭhānāni. Hatthaṅgulīsu mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni; majjhapabbaṭṭhīni aparipuṇṇapanasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni; aggapabbaṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni. Satta gīvaṭṭhīni daṇḍena vijjhitvā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitavaṃsakaḷīracakkalikasaṇṭhānāni. Heṭṭhimahanukaṭṭhi kammārānaṃ ayokūṭayottakasaṇṭhānaṃ, uparimaṃ avalekhanasatthakasaṇṭhānaṃ.
眼窝骨和鼻腔骨,形状像剥掉了髓的嫩棕榈核。额骨,形状像倒扣着的螺壳碟子。耳轮骨,形状像理发师用的剃刀鞘。在额骨和耳轮骨上方系头巾的位置,那块骨头形状像皱缩的满罐覆膜碎片。头顶骨,形状像砍去了嘴部的弯椰子。头盖骨,形状像缝合之后放着的破旧葫芦瓢。巴利
Akkhikūpanāsākūpaṭṭhīni apanītamiñjataruṇatālaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭaṭṭhi adhomukhaṭhapitasaṅkhathālakakapālasaṇṭhānaṃ. Kaṇṇacūḷikaṭṭhīni nhāpitakhurakosakasaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭakaṇṇacūḷikānaṃ upari paṭṭabandhanokāse aṭṭhi saṅkuṭitaghaṭapuṇṇapaṭalakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Muddhaṭṭhi mukhacchinnavaṅkanāḷikerasaṇṭhānaṃ. Sīsaṭṭhīni sibbetvā ṭhapitajajjaralābukaṭāhasaṇṭhānāni.
从方位来说,这些骨生在身体两侧。从所处位置来说,总体上都分布在全身。但具体来说,头骨安立在颈骨上,颈骨安立在脊椎骨上,脊椎骨安立在髋骨上,髋骨安立在大腿骨上,大腿骨安立在膝骨上,膝骨安立在小腿骨上,小腿骨安立在踝骨上,踝骨安立在足背骨上。从分界来说,内侧以骨髓为界,上方以肌肉为界,顶端和根部则彼此为界。这是它们的同类分界。而异类分界,则和头发等的分界一样。巴利
Disato dvīsu disāsu jātāni. Okāsato avisesena sakalasarīre ṭhitāni. Visesena panettha sīsaṭṭhīni gīvaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni, gīvaṭṭhīni piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīsu, piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni kaṭiṭṭhīsu, kaṭiṭṭhīni ūruṭṭhīsu, ūruṭṭhīni jaṇṇukaṭṭhīsu, jaṇṇukaṭṭhīni jaṅghaṭṭhīsu, jaṅghaṭṭhīni gopphakaṭṭhīsu, gopphakaṭṭhīni piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni. Paricchedato anto aṭṭhimiñjena, upari maṃsena, agge mūle ca aññamaññena paricchinnāni. Ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
骨髓:就是各种骨头内部的髓。颜色是白色的。形状上,大骨内部的骨髓,像放进竹筒里蒸过的大藤嫩梢;小骨内部的骨髓,像放进竹节里蒸过的细藤嫩梢。方位上,生于两侧。处所上,位于骨的内部。界限上,以骨的内表面为界。这是它的同类界限。异类界限则和头发一样。巴利
Aṭṭhimiñjanti tesaṃ tesaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaragataṃ miñjaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ. Saṇṭhānato mahantamahantānaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaragataṃ veḷunāḷiyaṃ pakkhittaseditamahāvettaggasaṇṭhānaṃ, khuddānukhuddakānaṃ abbhantaragataṃ veḷuyaṭṭhipabbesu pakkhittaseditatanuvettaggasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantare patiṭṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaratalehi paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肾脏:是一个整体相连的两个肉团。颜色是淡淡的红色,像巴利跋陀迦木的颜色。形状像小孩玩的双连球,或者像连在一个蒂上的两个芒果。从方位来说,生在上方。从所处位置来说,从喉窝伸出一根粗筋,走了一小段后分成两股,肾脏被它绑住,环绕着心肌而安住。从界限来说,肾脏以肾脏的部分为界。这是它的同类界限。异类界限则和头发等一样。巴利
Vakkanti ekabandhanā dve maṃsapiṇḍā. Taṃ vaṇṇato mandarattaṃ pāḷibhaddakaṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato dārakānaṃ yamakakīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānaṃ, ekavaṇṭapaṭibaddhaambaphaladvayasaṇṭhānaṃ vā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato galavāṭakā nikkhantena ekamūlena thokaṃ gantvā dvidhā bhinnena thūlanhārunā vinibaddhaṃ hutvā hadayamaṃsaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato vakkaṃ vakkabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
心脏:就是心肌。从颜色来说,它是红色的,像莲花花瓣背面的颜色。从形状来说,像去掉外层花瓣后倒着放的莲花花苞。外面光滑;里面像苦瓜的内部。有智慧的人,心脏稍微打开一点;智慧迟钝的人,心脏就是闭合的花苞状态。心脏里面有一个像紫矿核那么大的小凹窝,大约半合的血就停在那里;意界和意识界就是依靠它而运作的。这个心脏,对贪性重的人来说是红色的,对嗔性重的人来说是黑色的,对痴性重的人来说像洗肉水,对寻性重的人来说像绿豆汤的颜色,对信性重的人来说像迦尼迦罗花的颜色,对慧性重的人来说,则是清澈、明净、无浊、洁白、纯净的,就像洗净的天然宝石一样闪耀。从方位来说,它生于上方。从处所来说,它安住在身体内部两个乳房之间。从分界来说,心脏以心脏部分为界。这是它的同类分界。而异类分界,则和头发等的分界一样。巴利
Hadayanti hadayamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattaṃ padumapattapiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato bāhirapattāni apanetvā adhomukhaṭhapitapadumamakuḷasaṇṭhānaṃ. Bahi maṭṭhaṃ; anto kosātakīphalassa abbhantarasadisaṃ. Paññavantānaṃ thokaṃ vikasitaṃ, mandapaññānaṃ makuḷitameva. Anto cassa punnāgaṭṭhipatiṭṭhānamatto āvāṭako hoti, yattha aḍḍhapasatamattaṃ lohitaṃ saṇṭhāti; yaṃ nissāya manodhātu manoviññāṇadhātu ca vattanti. Taṃ panetaṃ rāgacaritassa rattaṃ hoti, dosacaritassa kāḷakaṃ, mohacaritassa maṃsadhovanudakasadisaṃ, vitakkacaritassa kulatthayūsavaṇṇaṃ, saddhācaritassa kaṇikārapupphavaṇṇaṃ, paññācaritassa acchaṃ vippasannaṃ anāvilaṃ paṇḍaraṃ parisuddhaṃ niddhotajātimaṇi viya jutimantaṃ khāyati. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ majjhe patiṭṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato hadayaṃ hadayabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肝脏:就是一对肉膜。从颜色来说,是淡红带黄的色调,像不太红的睡莲花瓣背面那种颜色。从形状来说,根部是一块,顶端分成两叉,像羊蹄甲的叶子形状。而且钝根的人只有一个大肝,有智慧的人则有两三个小肝。从方位来说,生在上方。从处所来说,位于两个乳房内侧的右边。从分界来说,肝脏以肝脏部分为界。这是它的同类分界。异类分界,则和头发等的分界一样。巴利
Yakananti yamakamaṃsapaṭalaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattapaṇḍukadhātukaṃ, nātirattakumudassa pattapiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato mūle ekaṃ, agge yamakaṃ koviḷārapattasaṇṭhānaṃ . Tañca dandhānaṃ ekameva hoti mahantaṃ, paññavantānaṃ dve vā tīṇi vā khuddakāni. Disato uparimadisāya jātaṃ. Okāsato dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ abbhantare dakkhiṇapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato yakanaṃ yakanabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肋膜:按有覆和无覆来分,有两种包裹内脏的肉膜。这两种颜色都是白色,像细布或粗布的颜色。形状上,各自跟自己所在位置形状一样。从方位来说,有覆肋膜生在上方,另一种生在两侧。从所处位置来说,有覆肋膜覆盖心脏和肾脏而存在;无覆肋膜则在全身皮下包裹肌肉而存在。从界限来说,下面以肌肉为界,上面以皮肤为界,横向以肋膜部分为界,这是它的同类分界;异类分界则和头发等的分界一样。巴利
Kilomakanti paṭicchannāpaṭicchannabhedato duvidhaṃ pariyonahanamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ duvidhampi vaṇṇato setaṃ, dukūlapilotikavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato attano okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato paṭicchannakilomakaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato paṭicchannakilomakaṃ hadayañca vakkañca paṭicchādetvā ṭhitaṃ. Apaṭicchannakilomakaṃ sakalasarīre cammassa heṭṭhato maṃsaṃ pariyonaddhitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyaṃ kilomakabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
脾脏:就是腹部里的舌状肉。它的颜色是青蓝色,像尼衮底花的颜色。形状大小约七指,没有系着,样子像黑牛犊的舌头。方位:生于上方。处所:位于心脏左侧,靠近腹膜的上部;如果这里受到打击而脱出,众生就会丧命。界限:以脾脏自身的部分为界,这是它的同类分界;异类分界则和头发等的分界一样。巴利
Pihakanti udarajivhāmaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato nīlaṃ nigguṇḍikapupphavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato sattaṅgulappamāṇaṃ abandhanaṃ kāḷavacchakajivhāsaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato hadayassa vāmapasse udarapaṭalassa matthakapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ, yasmiṃ paharaṇappahārena bahi nikkhante sattānaṃ jīvitakkhayo hoti. Paricchedato pihakabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肺:就是由三十二块肉分出来的肺肉。从颜色看,是红色的,像不太熟的无花果的颜色。从形状看,像切得不整齐、厚薄不匀的糕饼块。在身体里面,没有吃进、喝进东西的时候,因为生起的业生火界冲击它,所以像嚼过的稻草团一样,没有味道,也没有养分。从方位看,生在上方。从所处位置看,在身体内部,位于两个乳房之间,遮住心脏和肝脏,向下悬垂着。从界限看,以肺的部分为界。这是它同类之间的界限;不同类之间的界限,则和头发等一样。巴利
Papphāsanti dvattiṃsamaṃsakhaṇḍappabhedaṃ papphāsamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattaṃ nātipakkaudumbaraphalavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato visamacchinnabahalapūvakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Abbhantare asitapītānaṃ abhāve uggatena kammajatejusmanā abbhāhatattā saṅkhāditapalālapiṇḍamiva nirasaṃ nirojaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānamantare hadayañca yakanañca paṭicchādetvā olambantaṃ ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato phapphāsabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肠:男子的肠有三十二肘长,女子的肠有二十八肘长,在二十一个地方弯折盘曲。它的颜色是白的,像贝壳粉或石灰的颜色。形状像在血容器中盘折放置的被砍断头的蛇的样子。方位:从两个方向生起。处所:因为上端系在喉窝,下端系在粪道,所以位于喉窝和粪道之间的身体内部。界限:以肠的部分为界限,这是它的同类分界;异类分界则和头发一样。巴利
Antanti purisassa dvattiṃsa hatthā, itthiyā aṭṭhavīsatihatthā ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu obhaggā antavaṭṭi. Tadetaṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ sakkharasudhāvaṇṇaṃ . Saṇṭhānato lohitadoṇiyaṃ ābhujitvā ṭhapitasīsacchinnasappasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato upari galavāṭake heṭṭhā ca karīsamagge vinibandhattā galavāṭakakarīsamaggapariyante sarīrabbhantare ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato antabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肠间膜:是在肠曲之间起系缚作用的东西。它的颜色是白色,像白睡莲根的颜色。形状也像白睡莲根的形状。方向:生于两个方向。位置:就像人们做锄头、斧头等活儿时,在拉拽机械的时候,机械的绳子和木板把肠曲从一处束拢起来;又像把擦脚的绳圈缝合固定、使其间有绳线站立那样,它位于二十一处肠曲之间。界限:以肠间膜的部分为界限。这是它的同类界限;不同类的界限则像头发那样。巴利
Antaguṇanti antabhogaṭṭhānesu bandhanaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ dakasītalikamūlavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato dakasītalikamūlasaṇṭhānameva. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato kudāḷapharasukammādīni karontānaṃ yantākaḍḍhanakāle yantasuttamiva, yantaphalakāni antabhoge ekato agaḷante ābandhitvā pādapuñchanarajjumaṇḍalakassa antarā taṃ sibbetvā ṭhitarajjukā viya ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu antabhogānaṃ antarā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato antaguṇabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
胃中物,是指存在于胃里的已吃、已喝、已嚼、已尝的东西。从颜色来说,它是吞下去时食物的颜色。从形状来说,像滤水器里松散绑着的米粒。从方向来说,是从上方生起的。从位置来说,是停在胃中。所谓胃,就是从两侧被挤压时,像湿布中间鼓起来的水泡那样的肠膜;外面光滑,里面像包着肉和贝壳的脏旧布上的花絮,也可以说像煮熟菠萝蜜果肉里面的汁液那样;里面有蛲虫、蚯蚓状的虫、棕榈蛀虫、针口虫、绦虫等三十二种虫,乱纷纷地成群爬来爬去,住在里面;没有饮食的时候,它们就跳起来叫嚷,啃咬心脏的肉;饮食吞下去的时候,它们就仰起头,急急忙忙地抢夺最先吞下的两三口食物;这个胃就是那些虫的产房、厕所、病房和坟场。巴利
Udariyanti udare bhavaṃ asitapitakhāyitasāyitaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato parissāvane sithilabandhataṇḍulasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato udare ṭhitaṃ. Udaraṃ nāma ubhato nippīḷiyamānassa allasāṭakassa majjhe sañjātaphoṭakasadisaṃ antapaṭalaṃ; bahi maṭṭhaṃ, anto maṃsakasambukapaliveṭhanakiliṭṭhapāvārakapupphakasadisaṃ, kuthitapanasatacassa abbhantarasadisantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati; yattha takkoṭakā, gaṇḍuppādakā, tālahīrakā, sūcimukhakā, paṭatantasuttakā iccevamādidvattiṃsakulappabhedā kimayo ākulabyākulā saṇḍasaṇḍacārino hutvā nivasanti; ye pānabhojanādimhi avijjamāne ullaṅghitvā viravantā hadayamaṃsaṃ abhihananti, pānabhojanādiajjhoharaṇavelāya ca uddhaṃmukhā hutvā paṭhamajjhohaṭe dve tayo ālope turitaturitā vilumpanti; yaṃ tesaṃ kimīnaṃ sūtigharaṃ, vaccakuṭi, gilānasālā, susānañca hoti.
就像在旃陀罗村门口的污水沟里,夏天大雨倾盆的时候,被水冲来的粪、尿、皮、骨、筋、碎块、唾沫、鼻涕、血等各种各样腐烂的尸弃物,落进去以后跟泥水搅在一起,过了两三天就生出密密麻麻的虫群,被太阳的暴晒和热气蒸得翻滚沸腾,上面不断冒出泡沫和水泡,颜色深蓝,臭得不得了,恶心到极点,根本没法靠近,也没法去看,更别说去闻或者去尝了。同样地,各种喝的吃的东西,被牙齿像杵臼一样捣碎,被舌头和手翻来翻去,被口水和痰粘在一起,当下就失去了色香味等所有好处,变得像织布机上的脏水、像狗吐出来的东西一样,落进胃里以后,被胆汁、痰、风包住,被胃火的热力蒸得翻滚沸腾,里面虫群乱爬,上面不停地冒泡沫水泡,变得极其臭秽、极其恶心。光是听到这个情形,对饮食就已经生不起好感了,更何况用智慧的眼睛去看清楚呢。而且,落进胃里的饮食会分成五份:一份被虫吃掉,一份被胃火烧掉,一份变成尿,一份变成粪,一份变成营养精华,去滋养血肉等等。从界限来说,它以胃膜和胃中物为界,这是它同类部分的界限;不同类部分的界限,则跟头发一样。巴利
Yattha seyyathāpi nāma caṇḍālagāmadvāre candanikāya nidāghasamaye thūlaphusitake deve vassante udakena vuyhamānaṃ muttakarīsacammaaṭṭhinhārukhaṇḍakheḷasiṅghāṇikalohitappabhuti nānākuṇapajātaṃ nipatitvā kaddamodakāluḷitaṃ dvīhatīhaccayena sañjātakimikulaṃ sūriyātapavegasantāpakuthitaṃ upari pheṇapubbulake muñcantaṃ abhinīlavaṇṇaṃ paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ neva upagantuṃ na daṭṭhuṃ araharūpataṃ āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati, pageva ghāyituṃ vā sāyituṃ vā; evameva nānappakārapānabhojanādidantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ jivhāhatthaparivattitakheḷalālāpalibuddhaṃ taṅkhaṇavigatavaṇṇagandharasādisampadaṃ tantavāyakhalisuvānavamathusadisaṃ nipatitvā pittasemhavātapaliveṭhitaṃ hutvā udaraggisantāpavegakuthitaṃ kimikulākulaṃ uparūpari pheṇapubbulakāni muñcantaṃ paramakasambuduggandhajegucchabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati; yaṃ sutvāpi pānabhojanādīsu amanuññatā saṇṭhāti, pageva paññācakkhunā avaloketvā, yattha ca patitaṃ pānabhojanādi pañcadhā vibhāgaṃ gacchati – ekaṃ bhāgaṃ pāṇakā khādanti, ekaṃ bhāgaṃ udaraggi jhāpeti, eko bhāgo muttaṃ hoti, eko karīsaṃ, eko rasabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā soṇitamaṃsādīni upabrūhayati. Paricchedato udarapaṭalena ceva udariyabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
粪就是大便。它的颜色,大多数情况下和吃进去的食物颜色一样。形状则取决于所在的位置。从方位来说,它生在下方。从所处位置来说,它停留在熟脏里。所谓熟脏,是在肚脐和脊椎骨根部之间下方、肠子末端的地方,高度大约八指,形状像竹筒。就像雨水落在高处地面后,会渗流下去,积在低处一样;任何掉进生脏的饮食等物,被胃火煮熟,像用杵臼捣过一样变得细软,然后从肠子的孔洞中一点点渗下去,被挤压后,像塞进竹节里的黄泥一样堆积在那里。从界限来说,它以熟脏的膜和粪的部分为界。这是它的同分界限。而异分界限,则像头发一样。巴利
Karīsanti vaccaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato yebhuyyena ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇameva hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato pakkāsaye ṭhitaṃ. Pakkāsayo nāma heṭṭhā nābhipiṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānamantare antāvasāne ubbedhena aṭṭhaṅgulamatto veḷunāḷikasadiso, yattha seyyathāpi nāma uparūpari bhūmibhāge patitaṃ vassodakaṃ ogaḷitvā heṭṭhā bhūmibhāgaṃ pūretvā tiṭṭhati; evameva yaṃ kiñci āmāsaye patitaṃ pānabhojanādikaṃ udaragginā pheṇuddehakaṃ pakkaṃ pakkaṃ nisadāya pisitamiva saṇhabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā antabilena ogaḷitvā ogaḷitvā madditvā veḷupabbe pakkhipamānapaṇḍumattikā viya sannicitaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pakkāsayapaṭalena ceva karīsabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
脑髓:是位于头骨内部的髓质团块。它的颜色是白色,像菌盖的颜色,也可以说像还没凝成酸奶的变质牛奶的颜色。形状随所在空间而定。方位:从上方生起。处所:在头骨内部,依靠四条缝合线聚合而住,像四个面团一样聚在一起。界限:以头骨内面和脑髓部分为界,这是它的同分界限;异分界限则像头发一样。巴利
Matthaluṅganti sīsakaṭāhabbhantare ṭhitamiñjarāsi. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ ahicchattakapiṇḍikavaṇṇaṃ, dadhibhāvaṃ asampattaduṭṭhakhīravaṇṇantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sīsakaṭāhabbhantare cattāro sibbinimagge nissāya samodhānetvā ṭhapitā cattāro piṭṭhapiṇḍā viya samohitaṃ tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato sīsakaṭāhassa abbhantaratalehi ceva matthaluṅgabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
胆汁有两种:固定胆汁和非固定胆汁。其中,固定胆汁的颜色像浓稠的熟蜜油,非固定胆汁的颜色像枯萎杂乱的花束。从形状上说,两者都随所在位置而定形。从方位上说,固定胆汁生于上方,另一种则生于上下两方。从所处位置说,除了头发、体毛、牙齿、指甲这些没有肉的地方以及坚硬干燥的皮肤之外,非固定胆汁遍布整个身体,就像油滴在水中一样;当它紊乱时,眼睛会变黄、眩晕,身体颤抖、发痒。固定胆汁则位于心脏和肺之间的肝脏附近,储存在像大丝瓜囊一样的胆囊里;当它紊乱时,众生就会发疯,心智颠倒,抛弃惭愧,做不该做的事,说不该说的话,想不该想的事。从界限上说,以胆汁的部分为界,这是它的同类界限;不同类界限则和头发一样。巴利
Pittanti dve pittāni – baddhapittañca abaddhapittañca. Tattha baddhapittaṃ vaṇṇato bahalamadhukatelavaṇṇaṃ, abaddhapittaṃ milātaākulitapupphavaṇṇaṃ. Taṃ saṇṭhānato ubhayampi okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato baddhapittaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ, itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato abaddhapittaṃ ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca udakamiva telabinduṃ avasesasarīraṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ, yamhi kupite akkhīni pītakāni honti bhamanti, gattaṃ kampati kaṇḍuyati. Baddhapittaṃ hadayapapphāsānamantare yakanamaṃsaṃ nissāya patiṭṭhite mahākosātakīkosakasadise pittakosake ṭhitaṃ, yamhi kupite sattā ummattakā honti, vipallatthacittā hirottappaṃ chaḍḍetvā akattabbaṃ karonti, abhāsitabbaṃ bhāsanti, acintetabbaṃ cintenti. Paricchedato pittabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
痰是身体内部大约一掌心量那么多的痰。从颜色来说,它是白色的,像牛力叶汁的颜色。从形状来说,随所在位置而成形。从方位来说,生于上方。从所处位置来说,它停在胃膜上;当吞咽饮食等物时,就像水中的苔藓,当木片或陶片落下时裂成两半、随后又重新合拢覆盖一样,痰在饮食等物落下时也是裂成两半、随后又重新合拢覆盖;当它变得稀薄时,肚子就像熟透的痈疮、像臭鸡蛋一样,极其可厌,散发尸臭;从那里升起的臭气让打嗝和口腔也臭得像腐烂的尸体;这个人就会被人说:“走开,你散发恶臭!”当它增长变厚时,就像厕所的盖板一样,把尸臭封在胃膜里面。从界限来说,以痰的部分为界。这是它的同分界限。异分界限则和头发一样。巴利
Semhanti sarīrabbhantare ekapattapūrappamāṇaṃ semhaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ nāgabalapaṇṇarasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato udarapaṭale ṭhitaṃ, yaṃ pānabhojanādīni ajjhoharaṇakāle seyyathāpi nāma udake sevālapaṇakaṃ kaṭṭhe vā kapāle vā patante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhottharitvā tiṭṭhati, evameva pānabhojanādimhi nipatante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhottharitvā tiṭṭhati; yamhi ca mandībhūte pakkagaṇḍo viya pūtikukkuṭaṇḍamiva ca udaraṃ paramajegucchaṃ kuṇapagandhaṃ hoti; tato uggatena ca gandhena uddekopi mukhampi duggandhaṃ pūtikuṇapasadisaṃ hoti; so ca puriso ‘apehi, duggandhaṃ vāyasī’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati; yañca vaḍḍhitvā bahalattamāpannaṃ pidhānaphalakamiva vaccakuṭiyā udarapaṭalassa abbhantareyeva kuṇapagandhaṃ sannirujjhitvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato semhabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
所谓脓,是指由腐败的血液产生的。从颜色上说,它像枯叶的颜色;但在死尸身上,则像腐败浓稠的粥一样的颜色。从形状上说,它随所在处所的形状而定。从方位上说,它生于两个方向。从处所上说,脓并没有一个固定的地方可以积聚停留;无论身体哪个部位被树桩、荆棘、打击、火烧等所伤,血液在那里停滞、腐熟,或者生出疮、疖等,脓就停留在那些地方。从界限上说,以脓的部分来划分,这是它的同类界限;不同类的界限则和头发一样。巴利
Pubboti pūtilohitavasena pavattapubbo. So vaṇṇato paṇḍupalāsavaṇṇo, matakasarīre pana pūtibahalācāmavaṇṇo hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato pana pubbassa okāso nāma nibaddho natthi yattha so sannicito tiṭṭheyya; yatra yatra pana khāṇukaṇṭakappaharaṇaggijālādīhi abhihate sarīrappadese lohitaṃ saṇṭhahitvā paccati, gaṇḍapiḷakādayo vā uppajjanti, tatra tatreva tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pubbabhāgena paricchinno . Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
血有两种:积存的血和流动的血。其中,积存的血在颜色上像煮熟的浓稠虫胶汁,流动的血像清澈的虫胶汁。在形状上,两者都随所在位置而成形。在方位上,积存的血生于上方,另一种生于两个方向。在所处位置上,流动的血除了头发、体毛、牙齿、指甲这些没有肉的地方以及坚硬干燥的皮肤之外,顺着血管网络遍布整个执受的身体;积存的血则充满肝脏下方,约一钵之量,在心脏、肾脏、肺上方一点一点地渗漏,浸润着肺、心脏、肝脏、肾脏。当它不浸润肺、心脏等时,众生就会感到口渴。在界限上,以血的部分来划分,这是它的同类界限;不同类界限则和头发一样。巴利
Lohitanti dve lohitāni – sannicitalohitañca saṃsaraṇalohitañca. Tattha sannicitalohitaṃ vaṇṇato nipakkabahalalākhārasavaṇṇaṃ, saṃsaraṇalohitaṃ acchalākhārasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato ubhayampi okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato sannicitalohitaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ, itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato saṃsaraṇalohitaṃ, ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimmuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca, dhamanijālānusārena sabbaṃ upādinnakasarīraṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ; sannicitalohitaṃ yakanaṭṭhānassa heṭṭhābhāgaṃ pūretvā ekapattapūramattaṃ hadayavakkapapphāsānaṃ upari thokaṃ thokaṃ paggharantaṃ vakkahadayayakanapapphāse temayamānaṃ ṭhitaṃ. Tasmiñhi vakkahadayādīni atemente sattā pipāsitā honti. Paricchedato lohitabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
汗是从毛孔等处渗出的水界。它的颜色像澄清的芝麻油。形状则随所在位置而定。方位上,生于两个方向。就处所来说,汗并没有像血那样固定的住处,可以一直停留在那里;但当身体被火的热、太阳的热、季节变化等烤热时,汗就从全身毛发毛孔的缝隙中渗出来,像刚从水里捞出来、切得参差不齐的莲茎、藕根、睡莲花梗束一样。所以,它的形状也应当依毛发毛孔的缝隙来理解。修习汗业处的瑜伽行者,应当作意汗正充满并停留在毛发毛孔的缝隙中。就界限来说,以汗的部分为界限,这是它的同类界限;不同类界限则与头发相同。巴利
Sedoti lomakūpādīhi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu. So vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sedassokāso nāma nibaddho natthi, yattha so lohitaṃ viya sadā tiṭṭheyya; yadā pana aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvikārādīhi sarīraṃ santappati tadā udakato abbuḷhamattavisamacchinnabhisamūḷālakumudanāḷakalāpo viya sabbakesalomakūpavivarehi paggharati. Tasmā tassa saṇṭhānampi kesalomakūpavivarānaṃyeva vasena veditabbaṃ. Sedapariggaṇhakena ca yoginā kesalomakūpavivare pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva sedo manasikātabbo. Paricchedato sedabhāgena paricchinno. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
脂肪是固体的油脂。从颜色看,像切开的姜黄的颜色。从形状看,在肥胖者身上,它位于皮肤和肌肉之间,形状像姜黄色的粗布片;在瘦弱者身上,它依附在小腿肉、大腿肉、靠脊柱的背肉、腹围肉这些地方,叠成两层或三层,形状也像姜黄色的粗布片。从方位看,生于两个方向。从所处位置看,在肥胖者身上遍满全身,在瘦弱者身上则依附在小腿肉等处而住。它虽然被称为脂肪,但因为极其令人厌恶,人们不会取它来当头油或鼻油等。从界限看,下方以肉为界,上方以皮为界,横向以脂肪的部分为界,这是它的同类界限;不同类界限则和头发一样。巴利
Medoti thinasineho. So vaṇṇato phālitahaliddivaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato thūlasarīrassa tāva cammamaṃsantare ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno hoti, kisasarīrassa jaṅghamaṃsaṃ ūrumaṃsaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭakanissitaṃ piṭṭhamaṃsaṃ udaravaṭṭimaṃsanti etāni nissāya diguṇaṃ tiguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato thūlassa sakalasarīraṃ pharitvā, kisassa jaṅghamaṃsādīni nissāya ṭhito, yaṃ sinehasaṅkhaṃ gatampi paramajegucchattā neva muddhani telatthāya, na nāsātelādīnaṃ atthāya gaṇhanti. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyaṃ medabhāgena paricchinno. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
泪是眼所产生的水界。它的颜色像澄清的芝麻油。形状随所在的空间而定。方位上,属于上方。处所上,位于眼窝里。它不像胆囊里的胆汁那样一直积存在眼窝中;只有当众生心生欢喜而大笑,或心生忧愁而哭泣悲叹,或吃下这类不合适的食物,或者眼睛被烟、尘、沙等侵害时,才会由这些欢喜、忧愁、不合适的食物和时节等条件引生,充满眼窝,停在那里或流出来。不过,取泪相的瑜伽行者应当只按它充满眼窝而停住的状态来取相。从界限来说,以泪的部分为界,这是它的同分界限;异分界限则和头发一样。巴利
Assūti akkhīhi pagdharaṇakaāpodhātu. Taṃ vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato akkhikūpakesu ṭhitaṃ. Na cetaṃ pittakosake pittamiva akkhikūpakesu sadā sannicitaṃ tiṭṭhati; yadā pana sattā somanassajātā mahāhasitaṃ hasanti, domanassajātā rodanti paridevanti tathārūpaṃ visabhāgāhāraṃ āharanti, yadā ca nesaṃ akkhīni dhūmarajapaṃsukādīhi abhihaññanti, tadā etehi somanassadomanassavisabhāgāhārautūhi samuṭṭhahitvā akkhikūpake pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Assupariggaṇhakena pana yoginā akkhikūpake pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva pariggaṇhitabbaṃ. Paricchedato assubhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
“膏”是指已经融化的油脂。从颜色上说,它像椰子油的色泽,也可以说像倒在米汤上的油的颜色。从形状上说,它像洗澡时清水表面上漂浮散开的油滴那样。从方位上说,它生于两个方向。从所处位置上说,它大多存在于手掌、手背、脚掌、脚背、鼻翼、额头和肩峰这些地方。不过,它并不是在这些地方一直都保持融化状态停在那里;当这些部位因为火的热、太阳的热、时节不调、界不调等原因而变热时,它就会像洗澡时清水表面散开的油滴一样,在那里四处流动。从界限上说,它以膏的部分为界限。这是它同类上的界限。不同类上的界限,则和头发相似。巴利
Vasāti vilīnasneho. Sā vaṇṇato nāḷikeratelavaṇṇā, ācāme āsittatelavaṇṇātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato nhānakāle pasannaudakassa upari paribbhamantasinehabinduvisaṭasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato yebhuyyena hatthatalahatthapiṭṭhipādatalapādapiṭṭhināsāpuṭanalāṭaaṃsakūṭesu ṭhitā. Na cesā etesu okāsesu sadā vilīnāva hutvā tiṭṭhati; yadā pana aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvisabhāgadhātuvisabhāgehi te padesā usmā jātā honti, tadā tattha nhānakāle pasannaudakūpari sinehabinduvisaṭo viya ito cito ca saṃsarati. Paricchedato vasābhāgena paricchinnā . Ayamassā sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
唾液,是口腔里混着泡沫的水界。从颜色看是白色的,像泡沫的颜色。从形状看,随所在处的形状,也可以说像泡沫的形状。从方位看,生于上方。从所处位置看,从两颊内侧流下来,停在舌头上。它并不是一直积聚在那里不动的。当众生看到或想起那样的食物,或者把热的、苦的、辣的、咸的、酸的之类东西放进嘴里,或者心里感到疲惫,或者对什么东西生出厌恶时,唾液就会生起,从两颊内侧流下来,停在舌头上。它在舌尖处稀薄,在舌根处浓稠;放进嘴里的炒谷、米粒或其他任何嚼食,它都能像河滩上挖的坑里的水一样,使它们湿润而自身不耗尽。从界限看,是以唾液这一部分来划分的。这是它的同类界限。不同类界限则和头发相似。巴利
Kheḷoti antomukhe pheṇamissā āpodhātu. So vaṇṇato seto pheṇavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno, pheṇasaṇṭhānatotipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Disato uparimāya disāya jāto. Okāsato ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya ṭhito. Na cesa ettha sadā sannicito hutvā tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana sattā tathārūpaṃ āhāraṃ passanti vā saranti vā uṇhatittakaṭukaloṇambilānaṃ vā kiñci mukhe ṭhapenti, yadā vā nesaṃ hadayaṃ ākilāyati, kismiñcideva vā jigucchā uppajjati, tadā kheḷo uppajjitvā ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya saṇṭhāti. Aggajivhāya cesa tanuko hoti, mūlajivhāya bahalo; mukhe pakkhittañca puthukaṃ vā taṇḍulaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kiñci khādanīyaṃ, nadīpuḷine khatakūpakasalilaṃ viya, parikkhayaṃ agacchantova temetuṃ samattho hoti. Paricchedato kheḷabhāgena paricchinno. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
鼻涕,是从脑髓流出来的不净物。它的颜色像嫩多罗树核仁的颜色。形状随所在处的形状。方位上,是从上方生起的。处所上,是充满鼻翼而停在那里。它并不是一直积聚在这里不动的;而是像有人用莲叶把凝乳包起来,再从下面用刺刺穿,凝乳的乳清就从孔里漏出来流到外面——同样地,当有情哭泣,或者因为不适当的食物、时节等导致界扰动时,头颅内部变成腐败痰状的脑髓就漏下来,通过上颚顶端的孔道降下,充满鼻翼而停住或流出。不过,把握鼻涕的瑜伽行者,应当只按它充满鼻翼而停住的状态来把握。界限上,以鼻涕这一部分来划分。这是它的同分界限。异分界限则和头发相似。巴利
Siṅghāṇikāti matthaluṅgato paggharaṇakaasuci. Sā vaṇṇato taruṇatālaṭṭhimiñjavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātā. Okāsato nāsāpuṭe pūretvā ṭhitā. Na cesā ettha sadā sannicitā hutvā tiṭṭhati; atha kho yathā nāma puriso paduminīpattena dadhiṃ bandhitvā heṭṭhā kaṇṭakena vijjheyya, atha tena chiddena dadhimatthu gaḷitvā bahi pateyya, evameva yadā sattā rodanti vā visabhāgāhārautuvasena vā sañjātadhātukkhobhā honti, tadā antosīsato pūtisemhabhāvaṃ āpannaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ gaḷitvā tālumatthakavivarena otaritvā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Siṅghāṇikā pariggaṇhakena pana yoginā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva pariggaṇhitabbā. Paricchedato siṅghāṇikābhāgena paricchinnā. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
滑液:是身体关节内部的黏滑腐物。它的颜色像迦尼迦罗树树脂的颜色。形状随所在处的形状。方位:生于两个方向。处所:位于一百八十个关节内部,起润滑关节的作用。滑液少的人,在起立、坐下、前进、后退、弯曲、伸展时,骨头会嘎吱作响,走起路来像在发出指响一样,即使走了一由旬或二由旬的路,风界也会扰动,肢体疼痛。滑液多的人,在起立、坐下等动作时,骨头不会嘎吱作响,即使走了很长的路,风界也不会扰动,肢体不会疼痛。界限以滑液的部分来划分。这是它的同分界限。异分界限则与头发相似。巴利
Lasikāti sarīrasandhīnaṃ abbhantare picchilakuṇapaṃ. Sā vaṇṇato kaṇikāraniyyāsavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato aṭṭhisandhīnaṃ abbhañjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā asītisatasandhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitā. Yassa cesā mandā hoti, tassa uṭṭhahantassa nisīdantassa abhikkamantassa paṭikkamantassa sammiñjantassa pasārentassa aṭṭhikāni kaṭakaṭāyanti, accharāsaddaṃ karonto viya vicarati, ekayojanadviyojanamattampi addhānaṃ gatassa vāyodhātu kuppati, gattāni dukkhanti. Yassa pana bahukā hoti tassa uṭṭhānanisajjādīsu na aṭṭhīni kaṭakaṭāyanti, dīghampi addhānaṃ gatassa na vāyodhātu kuppati, na gattāni dukkhanti. Paricchedato lasikābhāgena paricchinnā. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
尿:从颜色上说,像绿豆碱水那样的颜色。从形状上说,像倒扣着的水罐内部积水的形状。从方位上说,生于下方。从处所说,位于膀胱内部。所谓膀胱,指的是膀胱囊袋。就像把无口的响罐丢进粪坑,粪坑里的液体进入罐中,却看不出它进入的通道;同样,尿从身体进入膀胱,看不出它进入的通道,但排出的通道却很清楚。当膀胱装满尿时,众生就会有“我要小便”的用力冲动。从界限上说,以膀胱内部和尿的部分为界。这是它的同分界限。异分界限则和头发相似。巴利
Muttanti vaṇṇato māsakhārodakavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato adhomukhaṭhapitaudakakumbhantaragataudakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato vatthissa abbhantare ṭhitaṃ. Vatthi nāma vatthipuṭo vuccati, yattha seyyathāpi nāma candanikāya pakkhitte amukhe ravaṇaghaṭe candanikaraso pavisati, na cassa pavisanamaggo paññāyati; evameva sarīrato muttaṃ pavisati, na cassa pavisanamaggo paññāyati, nikkhamanamaggo pana pākaṭo hoti; yamhi ca muttassa bharite ‘passāvaṃ karomā’ti sattānaṃ āyūhanaṃ hoti. Paricchedato vatthiabbhantarena ceva muttabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
像这样,先按颜色、形状、方位、处所、分界来确定头发等各个部分,然后依照次第、不太快、不太慢等方法,从颜色、形状、气味、住处、处所这五个方面作意“可厌、可厌”。当这样作意时,由于超越了概念,就像眼睛好的人看一串用一根线串起来的三十二种颜色的花环,所有的花都好像没有先后一样同时清晰地显现;同样地,当观察“这个身体里有头发”等,观察这个身体时,那些法也都好像没有先后一样同时清晰地显现。因此,在《作意善巧论》中说:“初学者作意‘头发’时,作意走过去,只碰到‘尿’这最后一部分就停住了。”巴利
Evañhi kesādike koṭṭhāse vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā anupubbato nātisīghato nātisaṇikatotiādinā nayena vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā ‘paṭikkūlā paṭikkūlā’ti manasikaroto paṇṇattisamatikkamavasena, seyyathāpi cakkhumato purisassa dvattiṃsavaṇṇānaṃ kusumānaṃ ekasuttagaṇṭhitaṃ mālaṃ olokentassa sabbapupphāni apubbāpariyamiva pākaṭāni honti, evameva ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā’’ti imaṃ kāyaṃ olokentassa sabbe te dhammā apubbāpariyamiva pākaṭā honti. Tena vuttaṃ manasikārakosallakathāyaṃ ‘‘ādikammikassa hi ‘kesā’ti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā ‘mutta’nti imaṃ pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
如果他又把作意转向外部,那么当所有部分都这样清晰地显现时,在他那里,游走其间的人、畜生等众生,其众生的形相就会消失,只是以一堆一堆的部分而显现;他们吞下去的饮食等,也显现得像被投进那一堆部分里一样。于是他按照逐步舍离等方法,反复作意“不净、不净”,渐渐就生起安止定。巴利
Sace pana bahiddhāpi manasikāraṃ upasaṃharati, athassa evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu pākaṭībhūtesu āhiṇḍantā manussatiracchānādayo sattākāraṃ vijahitvā koṭṭhāsarāsivaseneva upaṭṭhahanti; tehi ca ajjhohariyamānaṃ pānabhojanādi koṭṭhāsarāsimhi pakkhipiyamānamiva upaṭṭhāti. Athassa anupubbamuñcanādivasena ‘paṭikūlā paṭikūlā’ti punappunaṃ manasikaroto anukkamena appanā uppajjati.
在这里,依靠颜色、形状、方位、处所、分界来呈现头发等,就是取相;从一切方面以可厌的方式呈现,就是似相。他反复转向它、作意它,用寻和伺去推敲它,那时四蕴就以可厌为所缘,依初禅而生起安止。前分阶段的遍作心和近行心是有寻有伺、有喜、伴随悦受的,以可厌之相为所缘;安止心也同样是有寻有伺、有喜、伴随悦受。不过从地的层次来说,它们属于广大色界心。在这个可厌的所缘中,或者因为看到它的功德而生起悦受,或者仅仅依靠单一所缘的力量而生起。但第二禅等在这里不会生起。为什么?因为所缘粗。这个所缘确实是粗的。在这里,心一境性是依靠寻的力量生起的,而不是通过超越寻而生起。以上就是依止禅来说的业处论。巴利
Tattha kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ uggahanimittaṃ, sabbākārato paṭikūlavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Taṃ punappunaṃ āvajjentassa manasikarontassa takkāhataṃ vitakkāhataṃ karontassa cattāro khandhā paṭikūlārammaṇā honti, paṭhamajjhānavasena appanā pavattati. Pubbabhāge parikammaupacāracittāni savitakkasavicārāni sappītikāni somanassasahagatāni paṭikūlanimittārammaṇāni; appanāpi savitakkasavicārā sappītikā somanassasahagatāva. Bhūmantarena pana mahaggatā rūpāvacarā honti. Paṭikkūlepi ca etasmiṃ ārammaṇe ānisaṃsadassāvitāya somanassaṃ uppajjati, ekattārammaṇabaleneva vā taṃ uppajjati. Dutiyajjhānādīni panettha na nibbattanti. Kasmā? Oḷārikattā. Idañhi ārammaṇaṃ oḷārikaṃ. Vitakkabalenevettha cittekaggatā jāyati, na vitakkasamatikkamenāti. Ayaṃ tāva samathavasena kammaṭṭhānakathā.
不过,从共通、普遍的角度来说,应该这样理解:想要修习这个业处的人,在掌握了业处之后,诵习的时候,就应该用言语反复敲打、反复念诵头发等的颜色相、形状相、方位相、处所相、分界相,对每一个部分都以三种方式诵习:“这个跟那个相似。”怎样诵习呢?首先,对皮等五法,按照前面所说的方式,顺诵五天、逆诵五天、顺逆诵五天,一共诵习半个月。然后,到老师那里,掌握肾等五法后,同样诵习半个月。接着,把这十个部分合在一起诵习半个月。再逐一掌握肺等五法等,各诵习半个月。然后,把这十五个部分合在一起诵习半个月。脑等五法诵习半个月。然后,把这二十个部分合在一起诵习半个月。脂肪等六法诵习半个月。然后,把这二十六个部分合在一起诵习半个月。尿等六法诵习半个月。最后,把全部三十二个部分合在一起诵习半个月。这样,应该诵习六个月。巴利
Avisesato pana sādhāraṇavasena evaṃ veditabbaṃ – idañhi kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetukāmena kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā sajjhāyakāle eva kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇanimittasaṇṭhānanimittadisānimittaokāsanimittaparicchedanimittāni vācāya pothetvā pothetvā ekekakoṭṭhāse ‘ayaṃ etaṃsarikkhako’ti tividhena sajjhāyo kātabbo. Kathaṃ? Tacapañcake tāva heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva anulomato pañcāhaṃ, paṭilomato pañcāhaṃ, anulomapaṭilomato pañcāhanti addhamāsaṃ sajjhāyo kātabbo. Tato ācariyassa santikaṃ gantvā vakkapañcakaṃ uggaṇhitvā tatheva addhamāsaṃ sajjhāyo kātabbo. Tato te dasapi koṭṭhāse ekato katvā addhamāsaṃ. Puna papphāsapañcakādīsupi ekekaṃ uggaṇhitvā addhamāsaṃ. Tato te pañcadasapi koṭṭhāse addhamāsaṃ. Matthaluṅgapañcakaṃ addhamāsaṃ. Tato tevīsati koṭṭhāse addhamāsaṃ. Medachakkaṃ addhamāsaṃ. Tato te chabbīsatipi koṭṭhāse ekato katvā addhamāsaṃ. Muttachakkaṃ addhamāsaṃ. Tato sabbepi dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāse ekato katvā addhamāsanti evaṃ cha māse sajjhāyo kātabbo.
在这其中,对于具足助缘条件的智慧比丘来说,当他正在学习业处的时候,各部分就会自然显现出来;而有些人则不会显现。因此,不应该因为“不显现”就放弃精进。有多少部分显现出来,就应该按照那些部分来诵习。不过,在讲解业处的时候,不应该只针对智慧锐利的人来讲,也不应该只针对智慧迟钝的人来讲,而应该按照中等智慧的人来讲。因为过去的老师们正是按照中等智慧的人,以六个月为期限,制定了诵习的规范。如果有人在六个月到了的时候,各部分仍然没有变得清晰,那么他就应该继续进一步诵习;但不能没有期限地一直诵习下去,而应该每满六个月就重新评估一次。巴利
Tattha – upanissayasampannassa sappaññassa bhikkhuno kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhantasseva koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti, ekaccassa na upaṭṭhahanti. Tena ‘na upaṭṭhahantī’ti vīriyaṃ na vissajjetabbaṃ. Yattakā koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti tattake gahetvā sajjhāyo kātabbo. Evaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena pana neva paññavato na mandapaññassa vasena kathetabbaṃ, majjhimapaññassa vasena kathetabbaṃ. Majjhimapaññassa hi vasena ācariyā chahi māsehi paricchinditvā tantiṃ ṭhapayiṃsu. Yassa pana ettāvatāpi koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā na honti, tena tato parampi sajjhāyo kātabbo eva; no ca kho aparicchinditvā, cha cha māse paricchinditvāva kātabbo.
在诵习的时候,不应该去注意颜色,也不应该去作意特相,只应该按照各个部分来诵习。老师也不应该规定说“你按颜色来诵习”之后才教他。如果规定了之后再教,有什么过失呢?就算业处已经成就了,他也会生起“这是不成就”的想法。因为,如果老师说了“你按颜色来诵习”,这位比丘照着做的时候,业处并没有以颜色的方式呈现,而是以可厌的方式或者以界的方式呈现,这时他就会认为“这不是业处,是反常的”,然后把老师所说的硬套上去、抓住不放。如果老师说了“你按可厌来诵习”,他照着做的时候,业处并没有以可厌的方式呈现,而是以颜色或者以界的方式呈现,这时他同样会认为“这不是业处,是反常的”,然后把老师所说的硬套上去、抓住不放。如果老师说了“你按界来诵习”,他照着做的时候,业处并没有以界的方式呈现,而是以颜色或者以可厌的方式呈现,这时他也会认为“这不是业处,是反常的”,然后把老师所说的硬套上去、抓住不放。这就是老师规定了之后再教的过失。巴利
Sajjhāyaṃ karontena vaṇṇo na paccavekkhitabbo, na lakkhaṇaṃ manasikātabbaṃ, koṭṭhāsavaseneva sajjhāyo kātabbo. Ācariyenāpi ‘vaṇṇavasena sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti niyametvā na kathetabbaṃ. Niyametvā kathite ko dosoti? Sampattiyampi vipattisaññāāpajjanaṃ. Sace hi ācariyena ‘vaṇṇavasena sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vutte imassa bhikkhuno tathā karontassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaṇṇato na upaṭṭhāti, paṭikūlavasena vā dhātuvasena vā upaṭṭhāti, athesa ‘na idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vilakkhaṇa’nti saññī hoti, ācariyena kathitameva kappetvā gaṇhāti. ‘Paṭikūlavasena sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vuttepi sace tassa tathā karontassa paṭikkūlato na upaṭṭhāti, vaṇṇavasena vā dhātuvasena vā upaṭṭhāti, athesa ‘nayidaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vilakkhaṇa’nti saññī hoti, ācariyena kathitameva kappetvā gaṇhāti. ‘Dhātuvasena taṃ sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vuttepi sace tassa tathā karontassa dhātuto na upaṭṭhāti, vaṇṇavasena vā paṭikūlavasena vā upaṭṭhāti, athesa ‘nayidaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vilakkhaṇa’nti saññī hoti, ācariyena kathitameva kappetvā gaṇhāti. Ayaṃ ācariyena niyametvā kathite doso.
那该怎么对他说呢?应该对他说:你按各部分来诵习。怎么说呢?应该对他说:你按“发这一部分、毛这一部分”来诵习。如果他在这样按各部分诵习时,却是以颜色显现出来,那他就应该告诉教授师:我正按各部分诵习三十二身分,但对我来说,却是以颜色显现。教授师不应该误导他说:这像业处又不是业处,这是不正常的。而应该说:善哉,善士,你过去一定曾在色遍处做过预备修行。这个业处对你正合适。你就按颜色来诵习吧。他也应该按颜色来诵习。巴利
Kinti pana vattabbo hotīti? ‘Koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vattabbo. Kathaṃ? ‘Kesakoṭṭhāso lomakoṭṭhāsoti sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vattabbo. Sace panassa evaṃ koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karontassa vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti, athānena ovādācariyassa ācikkhitabbaṃ – ‘ahaṃ dvattiṃsākāraṃ koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karomi; mayhaṃ pana vaṇṇato upaṭṭhātī’ti. Ācariyena ‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ viya akammaṭṭhānaṃ, vilakkhaṇaṃ eta’nti na visaṃvādetabbaṃ. ‘Sādhu, sappurisa, pubbe tayā vaṇṇakasiṇe parikammaṃ katapubbaṃ bhavissati. Etadeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ tuyhaṃ sappāyaṃ. Vaṇṇavaseneva sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vattabbo. Tenapi vaṇṇavaseneva sajjhāyo kātabbo.
他这样修的时候,能在自身内部获得青、黄、红、白四种色遍。怎么获得呢?当他专注于头发、体毛、胆汁以及眼睛的黑色部位,把颜色作意为“青、青”时,四种禅或五种禅就会生起;以禅那作为基础,建立观禅后,就证得阿罗汉果。当他专注于脂肪以及眼睛的黄色部位,把颜色作意为“黄、黄”时,四种禅或五种禅就会生起;以禅那作为基础,建立观禅后,就证得阿罗汉果。当他专注于肉、血以及眼睛的红色部位,把颜色作意为“红、红”时,四种禅或五种禅就会生起;以禅那作为基础,建立观禅后,就证得阿罗汉果。当他专注于指甲、牙齿、皮肤、骨骼以及眼睛的白色部位,把颜色作意为“白、白”时,四种禅或五种禅就会生起;以禅那作为基础,建立观禅后,就证得阿罗汉果。这就是以色相为所缘而专注的比丘,直到证得阿罗汉果的整个引导过程。巴利
So evaṃ karonto ajjhattaṃ nīlakaṃ pītakaṃ lohitakaṃ odātakanti cattāri vaṇṇakasiṇāni labhati. Kathaṃ? Tassa hi kesalomapittesu ceva akkhīnañca kāḷakaṭṭhāne vaṇṇaṃ ‘nīlaṃ nīla’nti manasikarontassa catukkapañcakajjhānāni uppajjanti; jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Medasmiṃ pana akkhīnañca pītakaṭṭhāne vaṇṇaṃ ‘pītakaṃ pītaka’nti manasikarontassa catukkapañcakajjhānāni uppajjanti; jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Maṃsalohitesu pana akkhīnañca rattaṭṭhāne vaṇṇaṃ ‘lohitakaṃ lohitaka’nti manasikarontassa catukkapañcakajjhānāni uppajjanti; jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Nakhadantacammaaṭṭhīsu pana akkhīnañca paṇḍaraṭṭhāne vaṇṇaṃ ‘odātaṃ odāta’nti manasikarontassa catukkapañcakajjhānāni uppajjanti, jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Idaṃ vaṇṇavasena abhiniviṭṭhassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā nigamanaṃ.
另有一种情况:有人按照身体各部分来诵习时,厌恶相会现前。这时他应该告诉指导老师。老师不应该用“这像业处又不是业处,这是不正常的”这样的话来误导他。而应该对他说:“善哉,善士,你过去一定在厌恶作意上下过功夫。这个业处对你正合适。你就按厌恶相来诵习吧。”他也应该按厌恶相来诵习。当他这样按厌恶相诵习——“头发是丑陋的、恶臭的、可厌的、令人厌恶的”——就在以厌恶为所缘的境界中,生起初禅。他以禅那作为基础,建立观禅,最终证得阿罗汉果。这就是依厌恶相而专注的比丘,直到证得阿罗汉果的整个引导过程。巴利
Aparassa koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karontassa paṭikūlato upaṭṭhāti. Athānena ovādācariyassa ācikkhitabbaṃ. Ācariyena ‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ viya akammaṭṭhānaṃ, vilakkhaṇaṃ eta’nti na visaṃvādetabbaṃ. ‘Sādhu, sappurisa, pubbe tayā paṭikūlamanasikāre yogo kato bhavissati. Etadeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ tuyhaṃ sappāyaṃ. Paṭikūlavaseneva sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vattabbo. Tenapi paṭikūlavasena sajjhāyo kātabbo. Tassa kesā nāma ‘ajaññā duggandhā jegucchā paṭikūlā’ti evaṃ paṭikūlavasena sajjhāyaṃ karontassa paṭikūlārammaṇe paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattati. So jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Idaṃ paṭikūlavasena abhiniviṭṭhassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā nigamanaṃ.
另一个人按各部分诵习时,这些界就以界的方式显现出来。以界的方式显现时,是怎样显现的呢?先说头发,显现得像蚁丘顶上长出的昆塔草;体毛,像旧村遗址上长出的达巴草;指甲,像放在小棍上的马杜卡果壳;牙齿,像插进泥团里的葫芦籽;皮肤,像绷在维那琴琴面上的湿牛皮;肉,像涂在墙上的泥;筋,像捆扎木料堆的藤蔓;骨,像竖立起来的墙木料堆;骨髓,像放进大竹筒里煮过的藤条芯;肾脏、心脏、肝脏、肋膜、脾脏、肺脏这六个部分,显现得像屠夫的家;三十二肘长的肠,像盘绕在血槽里的家蛇;肠间膜,像缝在擦脚布上的绳子;胃中物,像放在滤器里松散绑着的米;粪,像装进竹筒里的黄泥;脑髓,像捣碎后放着的四个米粉团;十二种水界,像依次摆好的十二个水碗里盛满的水一样显现出来。巴利
Aparassa koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karontassa dhātuto upaṭṭhāti. Dhātuto upaṭṭhahantaṃ kīdisaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhātīti? Kesā tāva vammikamatthake jātakunthatiṇakāni viya hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Lomā purāṇagāmaṭṭhāne jātadabbatiṇakāni viya. Nakhā daṇḍakesu ṭhapitamadhukaphalaṭṭhikosakā viya. Dantā mattikāpiṇḍe pavesetvā ṭhapitaalābubījāni viya. Taco vīṇāpabbake pariyonaddhaallagocammaṃ viya, maṃsaṃ bhittiyaṃ anulittamattikā viya. Nhāru dabbasambhārabaddhavallī viya. Aṭṭhi ussāpetvā ṭhapitabhittidabbasambhāro viya. Aṭṭhimiñjaṃ mahāveḷumhi pakkhittaseditavettaggaṃ viya. Vakkaṃ, hadayaṃ, yakanaṃ, kilomakaṃ, pihakaṃ, papphāsanti ime cha koṭṭhāsā sūnakāragharaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Dvattiṃsahatthaṃ antaṃ lohitadoṇiyaṃ saṃvellitvā ṭhapitagharasappo viya. Antaguṇaṃ pādapuñchanake sibbitarajjukā viya. Udariyaṃ parissāvane sithilabandhataṇḍulaṃ viya. Karīsaṃ veṇupabbe pakkhittapaṇḍumattikā viya. Matthaluṅgaṃ omadditvā ṭhapitā cattāro taṇḍulapiṭṭhapiṇḍā viya. Dvādasavidhā āpodhātu paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitesu dvādasasu udakasarāvakesu pūritaudakaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti.
这时,他应当把情况告诉教授师。教授师不应该用“这像业处又不是业处,是异相的”这样的话来误导他,而应当说:“善哉,善士,你过去一定在界作意上下过功夫。这个业处对你正合适,你就依界来诵习吧。”他也应当依界来诵习。巴利
Athānena ovādācariyassa ācikkhitabbaṃ. Ācariyena ‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ viya akammaṭṭhānaṃ, vilakkhaṇaṃ eta’nti na visaṃvādetabbaṃ. ‘Sādhu, sappurisa, pubbe tayā dhātumanasikāre yogo kato bhavissati. Etadeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ tuyhaṃ sappāyaṃ. Dhātuvaseneva sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vattabbo. Tenapi dhātuvasena sajjhāyo kātabbo.
在这里,就以作意本身作为门径的诵习方法是这样的:比丘在这里作意:“头发,生在覆盖着头顶、贴着皮肤的皮肉上。它们不知道‘我们生在覆盖着头顶、贴着皮肤的皮肉上’;覆盖着头顶、贴着皮肤的皮肉也不知道‘头发在我里面生出来’。这些是没有心识的、无记的、空的、坚硬的、凝固的,这是地界。” “体毛,生在覆盖着身体的皮肤上。它们不知道‘我们生在覆盖着身体的皮肤上’;覆盖着身体的皮肤也不知道‘体毛在我里面生出来’。这些也是没有心识的。” “指甲,生在手指尖上。它们不知道‘我们生在手指尖上’;手指尖也不知道‘指甲在我们里面生出来’。这些也是没有心识的。” “牙齿,生在牙床骨上。它们不知道‘我们生在牙床骨上’;牙床骨也不知道‘牙齿在我里面生出来’。这些也是没有心识的。” “皮肤不知道‘身体被我覆盖着’;身体也不知道‘我被皮肤覆盖着’。这也是没有心识的。” “肉不知道‘身体被我涂满着’;身体也不知道‘我被肉涂满着’。这也是没有心识的。” “筋不知道‘我绑着骨聚而住立’;骨聚也不知道‘我被筋网绑着’。这也是没有心识的。”巴利
Tatridaṃ manasikāramukheneva sajjhāyavidhānaṃ – idha bhikkhu ‘kesā sīsaṃ pariyonaddhitvā ṭhitacamme jātā. Te na jānanti ‘mayaṃ sīsaṃ pariyonaddhitvā ṭhitacamme jātā’ti; sīsaṃ pariyonaddhitvā ṭhitacammampi na jānāti ‘kesā mayi jātā’ti; acetanā ete abyākatā suññā thaddhā patthinnā pathavīdhātu esā’ti manasikaroti. ‘Lomā sarīraṃ pariyonahanacamme jātā. Te na jānanti ‘mayaṃ sarīraṃ pariyonahanacamme jātā’ti. Sarīraṃ pariyonahanacammampi na jānāti ‘lomā mayi jātā’ti etepi acetanā. Nakhā aṅgulīnaṃ aggesu jātā. Te na jānanti ‘mayaṃ aṅgulīnaṃ aggesu jātā’ti. Aṅgulīnaṃ aggānipi na jānanti ‘nakhā amhesu jātā’ti. Etepi acetanā. Dantā hanukaṭṭhike jātā. Te na jānanti ‘mayaṃ hanukaṭṭhike jātā’ti. Hanukaṭṭhikampi na jānāti ‘dantā mayi jātā’ti. Etepi acetanā. Taco na jānāti ‘sarīraṃ mayā pariyonaddha’nti. Sarīrampi na jānāti ‘ahaṃ tacena pariyonaddha’nti. Ayampi acetano. Maṃsaṃ na jānāti ‘mayā sarīraṃ anulitta’nti. Sarīrampi na jānāti ‘ahaṃ maṃsena anulitta’nti. Idampi acetanaṃ. Nhāru na jānāti ‘ahaṃ aṭṭhipuñjaṃ ābandhitvā ṭhita’nti. Aṭṭhipuñjopi na jānāti ‘nhārujālenāhaṃ ābaddho’ti. Idampi acetanaṃ.
头骨不知道“我安立在颈骨上”。颈骨也不知道“头骨安立在我上面”。颈骨不知道“我立在背颈骨上”。背颈骨也不知道“我安立在腰骨、大腿骨、小腿骨、踝骨上”。踝骨也不知道“我抬起足跟骨而住”……颈骨不知道“我抬起头骨而住”。巴利
Sīsaṭṭhi na jānāti ‘ahaṃ gīvaṭṭhike patiṭṭhita’nti. Gīvaṭṭhikampi na jānāti ‘mayi sīsaṭṭhikaṃ patiṭṭhita’nti. Gīvaṭṭhi na jānāti ‘ahaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭake ṭhita’nti. Piṭṭhikaṇṭaṭṭhikopi kaṭiṭṭhikaṃ ūruṭṭhikaṃ jaṅghaṭṭhikaṃ gopphakaṭṭhikaṃ na jānāti ‘ahaṃ paṇhikaṭṭhike patiṭṭhita’nti. Paṇhikaṭṭhikampi na jānāti ‘ahaṃ gopphakaṭṭhikaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhitanti…pe… gīvaṭṭhikaṃ na jānāti ‘ahaṃ sīsaṭṭhikaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhita’nti.
骨头一根接一根立着,靠尖端支在一起,
没有任何人被众多关节连接束缚。
被筋腱绑住,又被衰老驱使,
没有意识,就像一块木头或木柴一样。巴利
Paṭipāṭiyā aṭṭhīni ṭhitāni koṭiyā, Anekasandhiyamito na kehici; Baddho nahārūhi jarāya codito, Acetano kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamo.
他这样作意:这也是无意识的——骨髓、肾脏……乃至脑,都是无意识的、无记的、空的、坚硬的、凝固的,属于地界。他这样作意:胆汁、痰……乃至尿,都是无意识的、无记的、空的、液态的,属于水界。巴利
‘Idampi acetanaṃ. Aṭṭhimiñjaṃ; vakkaṃ…pe… matthaluṅgaṃ acetanaṃ abyākataṃ suññaṃ thaddhaṃ patthinnaṃ pathavīdhātū’ti manasikaroti. ‘Pittaṃ semhaṃ…pe… muttaṃ acetanaṃ abyākataṃ suññaṃ yūsagataṃ āpodhātū’ti manasikaroti.
当他在把握这两大种时,腹中增盛的火界变得明显,鼻中增盛的风界变得明显。当他在把握这四大种时,所造色变得明显。所谓大种,是由所造色来界定的;所造色,是由大种来界定的。就像热是由影子来界定,影子是由热来界定;同样,大种由所造色来界定,所造色由大种来界定。然后,当他这样把握色蕴——“四大种和二十三种所造色,这就是色蕴”时,通过处和门的方式,非色的诸蕴变得明显。如此,对色与非色的把握就成为五蕴,五蕴成为十二处,十二处成为十八界。他依蕴、处、界,就像把一对多罗树的茎劈成两半一样,把名色分成两部分来确定。巴利
Ime dve mahābhūte pariggaṇhantassa udare ussadā tejodhātu pākaṭā hoti, nāsāya ussadā vāyodhātu pākaṭā hoti. Ime cattāro mahābhūte pariggaṇhantassa upādārūpaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Mahābhūtaṃ nāma upādārūpena paricchinnaṃ, upādārūpaṃ mahābhūtena. Yathā ātapo nāma chāyāya paricchinno, chāyā ātapena; evameva mahābhūtaṃ upādārūpena paricchinnaṃ , upādārūpaṃ mahābhūtena. Athassa evaṃ ‘‘cattāri mahābhūtāni tevīsati upādārūpāni rūpakkhandho’’ti rūpakkhandhaṃ pariggaṇhantassa āyatanadvāravasena arūpino khandhā pākaṭā honti. Iti rūpārūpapariggaho pañcakkhandhā honti, pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni honti, dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo hontīti khandhāyatanadhātuvasena yamakatālakandhaṃ phālento viya dve koṭṭhāse katvā nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapeti.
他这样审察:这个名色不是没有因、没有缘而生起的,而是有因、有缘才生起的。那它的因是什么?它的缘又是什么?当他确定了它的缘——以无明为缘、以渴爱为缘、以业为缘、以食为缘——之后,便超越了对于三世的疑惑:过去也只是缘和缘所生之法,未来也只是缘和缘所生之法,现在也只是缘和缘所生之法;在这之外,并没有所谓的有情或人,纯粹只是诸行的聚集罢了。这叫作“观行辨识”,也就是遍知智。巴利
So ‘‘idaṃ nāmarūpaṃ na ahetu na appaccayā nibbattaṃ, sahetu sappaccayā nibbattaṃ. Ko panassa hetu? Ko pana paccayo’’ti upaparikkhanto ‘‘avijjāpaccayā taṇhāpaccayā kammapaccayā āhārapaccayā cā’’ti tassa paccayaṃ vavatthapetvā ‘‘atītepi paccayā ceva paccayasamuppannadhammā ca anāgatepi etarahipi paccayā ceva paccayasamuppannadhammā ca, tato uddhaṃ satto vā puggalo vā natthi, suddhasaṅkhārapuñjo evā’’ti – evaṃ tīsu addhāsu kaṅkhaṃ vitarati. Ayaṃ pana vipassanāsaṅkhārasallakkhaṇā ñātapariññā nāma.
比丘这样观察诸行而安住之后,在十力者的教法里,就可以说他已扎下了根,已经获得了立足处,可称为“小入流者”,且已决定趣向。不过,当他得到合适的气候、合适的人、合适的食物、合适的闻法机会之后,在一座之中,以殊胜的跏趺坐而坐,提起三相,依照观修的次第观照诸行,就能证得阿拉汉果。这是对以界为所缘而用功的比丘,直到阿拉汉果的导引。巴利
Evaṃ saṅkhāre sallakkhetvā ṭhitassa pana bhikkhussa dasabalassa sāsane mūlaṃ otiṇṇaṃ nāma hoti, patiṭṭhā laddhā nāma, cūḷasotāpanno nāma hoti niyatagatiko. Tathārūpaṃ pana utusappāyaṃ, puggalasappāyaṃ, bhojanasappāyaṃ, dhammasavaṇasappāyaṃ labhitvā ekāsane ekapallaṅkavaragato tīṇi lakkhaṇāni āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā saṅkhāre sammasanto arahattaṃ gaṇhātīti idaṃ dhātuvasena abhiniviṭṭhassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā nigamanaṃ.
如果对某个人,既不能从颜色上现起,也不能从厌恶上现起,也不能从空上现起,那么他不应该因为“它没有在我心中现起”就放弃业处而坐着不动,而应该只致力于部分作意。据说古代长老们说过:“部分作意本身就是标准。”这样,当他反复按部分来诵习时,各部分就会变得熟练。那么,什么时候才叫熟练呢?当刚一作意“头发”时,心就运行并安住在最后一部分“脑”;当刚一作意“脑”时,心就回转并安住在最初部分“头发”。巴利
Yassa pana neva vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti na paṭikūlato na suññato tena ‘na me upaṭṭhātī’ti na kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā nisīditabbaṃ, koṭṭhāsamanasikāreyeva pana yogo kātabbo. Porāṇakattherā kira ‘koṭṭhāsamanasikārova pamāṇa’nti āhaṃsu. Iccassa punappunaṃ koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karontassa koṭṭhāsā paguṇā honti. Kadā pana paguṇā nāma hontīti? Yadā ‘kesā’ti āvajjitamatte manasikāro gantvā ‘matthaluṅga’nti antimakoṭṭhāse patiṭṭhāti, ‘matthaluṅga’nti āvajjitamatte manasikāro āgantvā ‘kesā’ti ādikoṭṭhāse patiṭṭhāti.
就像一个有眼睛的人,看着把三十二种颜色的花串在一根线上的花环,或者退后几步,看着依次插在地上的三十二根桩,那三十二种颜色的花或桩就按顺序清清楚楚地显现出来;同样地,三十二个部分也现起。行走着的畜生、人或有情,不会现起为畜生、人、有情,而是现起为部分。所吃的嚼食、啖食,就好像被放进各个部分之间一样。巴利
Athassa yathā nāma cakkhumato purisassa dvattiṃsavaṇṇānaṃ pupphānaṃ ekasuttaganthitaṃ mālaṃ olokentassa paṭipāṭiyā vā pana nikhāte dvattiṃsavatipāde paṭikkamitvā olokentassa paṭipāṭiyāva dvattiṃsavaṇṇāni pupphāni vatipādā vā pākaṭā honti, evameva dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti, vicarantā tiracchānagatāpi manussāpi sattāti na upaṭṭhahanti, koṭṭhāsāti upaṭṭhahanti, khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ koṭṭhāsantare pakkhippamānaṃ viya hoti.
从对身体各部分(肢节)熟练的时候开始,他就会从三个门中的某一个门解脱。业处会以颜色、或以厌恶、或以空的方式现起。就像想烤饼的女人,从揉好放着的面团里,想烤哪个就烤哪个;又像放在平地上的装满水的罐子,从哪个方向敲击,水就从那里流出来;同样,从对身体各部分熟练的时候开始,他就会从三个门中的某一个门解脱。如果他想要,业处就会从颜色现起;如果他想要,就会从厌恶现起;如果他想要,就会从空现起。这叫做“摄持阶段”。安住在这个摄持阶段而证得阿罗汉果的比丘,已经超越了计数的范围。巴利
Koṭṭhāsānaṃ paguṇakālato paṭṭhāya tīsu mukhesu ekena mukhena vimuccissati. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaṇṇato vā paṭikūlato vā suññato vā upaṭṭhāti . Yathā nāma pūve pacitukāmā itthī madditvā ṭhapitapiṭṭhato yaṃ yaṃ icchati taṃ taṃ pacati, yathā vā pana same bhūmippadese ṭhapitaṃ udakapūraṃ kumbhaṃ yato yato āvijjhanti tato tatova udakaṃ nikkhamati; evameva koṭṭhāsānaṃ paguṇakālato paṭṭhāya tīsu mukhesu ekena mukhena vimuccissati. Ākaṅkhamānassa vaṇṇato, ākaṅkhamānassa paṭikūlato, ākaṅkhamānassa suññato kammaṭṭhānaṃ upaṭṭhahissatiyeva. Ayaṃ ettako uggahasandhi nāma. Imasmiṃ uggahasandhismiṃ ṭhatvā arahattaṃ pattā bhikkhu gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā.
如果有人在摄持阶段业处不能现起,他就应该先掌握业处,然后如果老师住的地方适合,那是好的;如果不适合,就应该住在适合的地方。住下来时,要避开十八种住处的过失,住在具备五种条件的住所,自己也要具备五种条件。然后,饭后托钵回来,进入夜间住处或白天住处,应当作意业处。巴利
Yassa pana uggahasandhismiṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ na upaṭṭhāti, tena kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā, sace yattha ācariyo vasati, so āvāso sappāyo hoti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ; no ce, sappāyaṭṭhāne vasitabbaṃ. Vasantena aṭṭhārasa vihāradose (visuddhi. 1.52) vajjetvā pañcaṅgasamannāgate senāsane vasitabbaṃ, sayampi pañcaṅgasamannāgatena bhavitabbaṃ. Tato pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantena rattiṭṭhānaṃ vā divāṭṭhānaṃ vā pavisitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātabbaṃ.
怎么修呢?首先,应该像前面所说的那样,按顺序作意,不要跳着来。因为按顺序作意的人,就像一个人顺着三十二级台阶一级一级往上走,登上殿堂,享受殿堂的好处一样;他按“头发、体毛”这样的顺序作意业处,既不会从业处上退失,也能体验到像殿堂好处那样的九种出世间法。而且,按顺序作意时,不应该太快,也不应该太慢。因为作意太快的人,虽然业处会变熟练,但却不清楚。这里的比喻和前面所说的一样。巴利
Kathaṃ? Ādito tāva heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva anupubbato manasikātabbaṃ, na ekantarikā. Anupubbato manasikaronto hi dvattiṃsapadaṃ nisseṇiṃ padapaṭipāṭiyā akkamanto pāsādaṃ āruyha pāsādānisaṃsaṃ anubhavanakapuriso viya ‘kesā lomā’ti paṭipāṭiyā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaronto kammaṭṭhānato ca na parihāyati, pāsādānisaṃsasadise ca nava lokuttaradhamme anubhavati. Anupubbato manasikarontenāpi ca nātisīghato nātisaṇikato manasikātabbaṃ. Atisīghato manasikarontassa hi kiñcāpi kammaṭṭhānaṃ paguṇaṃ hoti, avibhūtaṃ pana hoti. Tattha opammaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
作意得太慢的人,业处到不了终点,中途就会退堕。就像一个人傍晚系好腰带,走上三由旬的路,从出发的地方开始,看到清凉的树荫就停下来休息,看到可爱的沙地就躺下来舒展身体,看到林中的池塘就喝水、洗澡,看到山就爬上去欣赏山景;结果就在半路上,被狮子、老虎或豹子咬死,或者被盗贼抢劫杀害。同样,作意得太慢的人,业处到不了终点,中途就会退堕。巴利
Atisaṇikato manasikarontassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchati, antarāva osakkitabbaṃ hoti. Yathā hi puriso tiyojanaṃ maggaṃ sāyaṃ kacchaṃ bandhitvā paṭipanno nikkhantaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya sītalacchāyaṃ disvā vissamati, ramaṇīyaṃ vālikatalaṃ disvā piṭṭhiṃ pasāreti, vanapokkharaṇiṃ disvā pānīyaṃ pivati nhāyati, pabbataṃ disvā āruyha pabbatarāmaṇeyyakaṃ passati, taṃ antarāyeva sīho vā byaggho vā dīpi vā hanati, corā vā pana viluppanti ceva hananti ca; evameva atisaṇikaṃ manasikarontassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchati, antarāva osakkitabbaṃ hoti.
因此,既不能太快也不能太慢,每天应作意三十次:清晨十次,中午十次,傍晚十次,必须诵习,不可以不做。就像清晨起床后不能不洗脸,不能不嚼食、不吃食物一样;那些事尚且可以通融,唯独这件事绝对不可以不做;做这件事的人能获得大利益。譬如一个人有三块田:一块田产八罐,一块产十六罐,一块产三十二罐;他若无力照料三块田,就会舍弃两块,只照料那块产三十二罐的田;就在那块田里做耕、种、除草等事;那块田会为他提供照料另外两块田所需的劳力之资。同样地,即使舍弃洗脸等其他事务,也应当唯独在这件事上用功,不可以不做。做这件事的人能获得大利益。到这里,就说明了所谓的中道。巴利
Tasmā nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikaṃ ekadivasaṃ tiṃsavāre manasikātabbaṃ; pātova dasa vāre, majjhanhike dasavāre, sāyanhe dasa vāre sajjhāyo kātabbo, no kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Yathā hi pātova uṭṭhāya mukhaṃ no dhovituṃ na vaṭṭati, khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ no khādituṃ no bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati; etaṃ pana vaṭṭeyya; idameva ekantena no kātuṃ na vaṭṭati; karonto mahantaṃ atthaṃ gahetvā tiṭṭhati. Yathā hi ekassa purisassa tīṇi khettāni; ekaṃ khettaṃ aṭṭhakumbhaṃ deti, ekaṃ soḷasa, ekaṃ dvattiṃsa; tena tīṇipi khettāni paṭijaggituṃ asakkontena dve chaḍḍetvā ekaṃ dvattiṃsakumbhadāyakameva paṭijaggitabbaṃ; tattheva kasanavapananiddānādīni kātabbāni; tadevassa itaresu dvīsu uṭṭhānakadāyaṃ dassati; evameva sesaṃ mukhadhovanādikammaṃ chaḍḍetvāpi ettheva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ, no kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Karonto mahantaṃ atthaṃ gaṇhitvā tiṭṭhatīti ettāvatā majjhimā paṭipadā nāma kathitā.
这样修行的人,也要防止心散乱。因为一旦放下业处,心向外散乱,就会从业处上退失,无法超越轮回的怖畏。就像有人赚到一千金、获得利息后上路远行,途中登上一座架在深险山峡上的独木桥——那山峡里有鳄鱼、巨鳄、罗刹出没。他走的时候,如果放下脚步、东张西望,就会摔下去,成为鳄鱼等的食物;同样,这个人一旦放下业处,心向外散乱,就会从业处上退失,无法超越轮回的怖畏。巴利
Evaṃ paṭipannenāpi vikkhepo paṭibāhitabbo. Kammaṭṭhānañhi vissajjetvā citte bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ gacchante kammaṭṭhānato parihāyati, vaṭṭabhayaṃ samatikkamituṃ na sakkoti. Yathā hi eko puriso sahassuddhāraṃ sādhetvā vaḍḍhiṃ labhitvā addhānaṃ paṭipanno antarāmagge kumbhīlamakaragāharakkhasasamuṭṭhitāya gambhīragirikandarāya upari atthataṃ ekapadikaṃ daṇḍakasetuṃ āruyha gacchanto akkamanapadaṃ vissajjetvā ito cito ca olokento paripatitvā kumbhīlādibhattaṃ hoti, evameva ayampi kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā sacitte bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ gacchante kammaṭṭhānato parihāyati, vaṭṭabhayaṃ samatikkamituṃ na sakkoti.
这里应当用比喻来对应理解:就像一个人借得一千贷款、已获得利息的时候,这就好比这位比丘在老师跟前学习业处的时候;中间那些幽深险峻的山峡,就好比轮回;他被鳄鱼等咬住的时候,就好比轮回根本的大苦;独木桥就好比这位比丘诵习的途径;而那个人登上独木桥后,放开脚步、东张西望,结果跌落下去,成了鳄鱼等的食物——这时候就应当知道,这就像这位比丘舍弃了业处,心向外散乱,于是从业处上退失,无法超越轮回的怖畏。巴利
Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – purisassa sahassuddhāraṃ sādhetvā vaḍḍhiṃ laddhakālo viya hi imassa bhikkhuno ācariyasantike kammaṭṭhānassa uggahitakālo; antarā gambhīragirikandarā viya saṃsāro; tassa kumbhīlādīhi daṭṭhakālo viya vaṭṭamūlakāni mahādukkhāni; ekapadikadaṇḍakasetu viya imassa bhikkhuno sajjhāyavīthi; tassa purisassa ekapadikaṃ daṇḍakasetuṃ āruyha akkamanapadaṃ vissajjetvā ito cito ca olokentassa paripatitvā kumbhīlādīnaṃ bhattabhāvaṃ āpannakālo viya imassa bhikkhuno kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā vikkhittacittassa kammaṭṭhānato parihāyitvā vaṭṭabhayaṃ samatikkamituṃ asamatthabhāvo veditabbo.
所以,应当作意“头发”。作意“头发”之后,要防止心向外散乱,以清净的心作意“体毛、指甲、牙齿、皮肤”。这样作意的人,不会从业处退失,能超越轮回的怖畏。这里的比喻,应将那个比喻本身转用而理解:就像一个善巧的人,筹得千金、获得利息之后,登上独木桥,整理好下衣和上衣,让身体稳固,平安到达对岸;同样,善巧的比丘作意“头发”之后,防止心向外散乱,以清净的心作意“体毛、指甲、牙齿、皮肤”,不会从业处退失,能超越轮回的怖畏,应当这样理解。巴利
Tasmā kesā manasikātabbā. Kese manasikaritvā cittuppādassa bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhitvā suddhacitteneva ‘lomā nakhā dantā taco’ti manasikātabbaṃ. Evaṃ manasikaronto kammaṭṭhānato na parihāyati, vaṭṭabhayaṃ samatikkamati. Opammaṃ panettha tadeva parivattetvā veditabbaṃ. Sahassuddhāraṃ sādhetvā vaḍḍhiṃ labhitvā chekassa purisassa daṇḍakasetuṃ āruyha nivāsanapārupanaṃ saṃvidhāya dhātupatthaddhakāyaṃ katvā sotthinā paratīragamanaṃ viya chekassa bhikkhuno kese manasikaritvā cittuppādassa bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhitvā suddhacitteneva ‘lomā nakhā dantā taco’ti manasikarontassa kammaṭṭhānato aparihāyitvā vaṭṭabhayaṃ samatikkamanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
像这样,即使是在防止心向外散乱时,也应当依照前面所说的方式,通过超越概念来作意。舍弃“头发、体毛”这些概念之后,应当把念安立在“不净、不净”上。不过,一开始“不净”并不会显现出来。只要“不净”还没有显现,就不应该舍弃概念。当“不净”显现时,才舍弃概念,作意“不净”。作意的时候,也应当依照前面所说的方式,从五种角度作意为不净。因为在皮五法中,正好可以依颜色、形状、气味、所依、处所这五种方式获得不净。在其余的部分中,能获得哪一种不净,就依那一种来让作意生起。巴利
Evaṃ bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhantenāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamanato manasikātabbaṃ. ‘Kesā lomā’ti paṇṇattiṃ vissajjetvā ‘paṭikūlaṃ paṭikūla’nti sati ṭhapetabbā. Paṭhamaṃyeva pana paṭikūlato na upaṭṭhāti . Yāva na upaṭṭhāti tāva paṇṇatti na vissajjetabbā. Yadā upaṭṭhāti tadā paṇṇattiṃ vissajjetvā ‘paṭikūla’nti manasikātabbaṃ. Karontena ca heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva pañcahākārehi paṭikūlato manasikātabbā. Tacapañcakasmiñhi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavaseneva pañcavidhampi pāṭikūlyaṃ labbhati. Sesesupi yaṃ yaṃ labbhati, tassa tassa vasena manasikāro pavattetabbo.
在这里,头发等五种身体部分被称为净相、贪染的所依、可爱的所缘。凡是会生起贪染的众生,都会对这五种身体部分生起贪染。而这位比丘,在一般众生生起贪染的地方,把“厌恶”修到了安止定。从达到安止定的那一刻起,他之后就能毫不费力地达到安止定。巴利
Tattha kesādayo pañca koṭṭhāsā subhanimittaṃ rāgaṭṭhāniyaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇanti saṅkhaṃ gatā. Ye keci rajjanakasattā nāma, sabbe te imesu pañcasu koṭṭhāsesu rajjanti. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu mahājanassa rajjanaṭṭhāne ‘paṭikūla’nti appanaṃ pāpeti. Tattha appanāppattito paṭṭhāya parato akilamantova appanaṃ pāpuṇāti.
这里有一个譬喻。就像有个技术高明的弓箭手,讨得国王欢心后,得到了一座税收十万的殊胜村庄。他披挂整齐,带着五种兵器前往那里。半路上看见三十二个盗贼,就杀掉了其中五个贼首。从他们被杀的那一刻起,剩下的盗贼就不再走同一条路了。应当这样理解这个情形:弓箭手讨得国王欢心、获得殊胜村庄的那一刻,就好比这位比丘在老师跟前学得业处之后安住的那个时候;三十二个盗贼就好比三十二个身体部分;五个贼首就好比头发等五个部分;贼首被杀的那一刻,就好比这位比丘在众生贪着的头发等五法上,以“厌恶”修到安止的那一刻;剩下的盗贼只因为拍手就逃散,应当知道这就好比他在其余身体部分上毫不费力地达到安止。巴利
Tatridaṃ opammaṃ – yathā hi cheko dhanuggaho rājānaṃ ārādhetvā satasahassuṭṭhānakaṃ gāmavaraṃ labhitvā sannaddhapañcāvudho tattha gacchanto antarāmagge dvattiṃsa core disvā tesu pañcacorajeṭṭhake ghāteyya; tesaṃ ghātitakālato paṭṭhāya tesu dve ekamaggaṃ paṭipajjamānā nāma na honti; evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dhanuggahassa rājānaṃ ārādhetvā gāmavaraṃ laddhakālo viya hi imassa bhikkhuno ācariyasantike kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā ṭhitakālo; dvattiṃsa corā viya dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā; pañca corajeṭṭhakā viya kesādayo pañca; corajeṭṭhakānaṃ ghātitakālo viya imassa bhikkhuno sabbasattānaṃ rajjanaṭṭhāne tacapañcake ‘paṭikūla’nti appanāya pāpitakālo; sesacorānaṃ pāṇippahāreneva palāyitakālo viya sesakoṭṭhāsesu akilamantasseva appanāppatti veditabbā.
像这样,在超越概念的同时,要以逐步放下的方式来作意:当心念放在头发上时,就在专注头发的当下,对头发保持关注,同时把正念送到体毛上。只要体毛还没有在觉知中现起,就继续作意“头发、头发”。当体毛现起时,就放下头发,把正念安立在体毛上。对指甲等其余部分,也应当这样来作意。巴利
Evaṃ paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamantena ca anupubbamuñcanato manasikāro pavattetabbo – kese manasikarontena manasikaronteneva kesesu sāpekkhena hutvā lomesu sati pesetabbā. Yāva lomā na upaṭṭhahanti tāva ‘kesā kesā’ti manasikātabbā. Yadā pana lomā upaṭṭhahanti tadā kese vissajjetvā lomesu sati upaṭṭhapetabbā. Evaṃ nakhādīsupi manasikāro pavattetabbo.
这里有一个譬喻:就像水蛭在爬行时,只要前方还没找到落脚点,就不会放开尾巴抓住的后方位置;一旦前方找到了落脚点,它就抬起尾巴,放到嘴所抓住的地方。同样地,当作意于头发时,就在作意头发的当下,对头发有所期待,然后把念送往身毛。只要身毛还没有现起,就一直作意“头发、头发”。当身毛现起时,就放下头发,把念安立在身毛上。对指甲等其余部分,也应当这样持续作意。巴利
Tatridaṃ opammaṃ – yathā hi jalūkā gacchamānā yāva purato patiṭṭhaṃ na labhati tāva pacchato naṅguṭṭhena gahitaṭṭhānaṃ na muñcati; yadā pana purato patiṭṭhaṃ labhati tadā naṅguṭṭhaṃ ukkhipitvā mukhena gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapeti; evameva kese manasikarontena manasikaronteneva kesesu sāpekkhena hutvā lomesu sati pesetabbā. Yāva lomā na upaṭṭhahanti tāva ‘kesā kesā’ti manasikātabbā. Yadā lomā upaṭṭhahanti tadā kese vissajjetvā lomesu sati upaṭṭhapetabbā. Evaṃ nakhādīsupi manasikāro pavattetabbo.
这样运作时就能达到安止,所以应当完成前面所说的“作意善巧”。怎么完成呢?当人对这个安止业处作意时,就能达到安止;但最初它并不会现起。因为在无始以来的轮回流转中,心已经在种种不同的所缘上不断增长,所以当它只是转向“头发”时,就会顺着诵习的流向而去,停留在脑上。当只是转向“脑”时,又会顺着诵习的流向而来,停留在头发上。可是,当人一再作意、一再作意时,那一个又一个部分就会现起,念和定也能持续运作。对于哪一个部分现起得更明显,就在那一个部分上加倍用功,使安止生起。这样,从达到安止的时候开始,对其余部分也能不费力地达到安止。在这里,有一个像棕榈林中的猴子那样的譬喻。巴利
Evaṃ pavattentena appanā hotīti vuttamanasikārakosallaṃ sampādetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Idañhi appanākammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontassa appanaṃ pāpuṇāti; paṭhamaṃyeva tāva na upaṭṭhāti; anamataggasmiñhi saṃsāravaṭṭe ca nānārammaṇesu vaḍḍhitaṃ cittaṃ ‘kesā’ti āvajjitamatte sajjhāyasotānusārena gantvā matthaluṅge patiṭṭhāti. ‘Matthaluṅga’nti āvajjitamatte sajjhāyasotānusārena āgantvā kesesu patiṭṭhāti. Manasikarontassa manasikarontassa pana so so koṭṭhāso upaṭṭhāti. Sati samādhināpi tiṭṭhamānā pavattati. Tena yo yo koṭṭhāso adhikataraṃ upaṭṭhāti tattha tattha dviguṇena yogaṃ katvā appanā pāpetabbā. Evaṃ appanāya pāpitakālato paṭṭhāya sesakoṭṭhāsesu akilamanto appanaṃ pāpeti. Tattha tālavanamakkaṭova opammaṃ.
在这里,也应该这样理解它们的对应关系:有一座长着三十二棵棕榈树的棕榈林,里面住着一只猴子。猎人想抓住它,就站在最边上那棵棕榈树的树下,发出“呜”的吆喝声。那只生性傲慢的猴子便从一棵棕榈树跳到另一棵,最后停在最边上的那棵棕榈树上。猎人又走到那里,也发出“呜”的吆喝声。猴子同样又跳回先前那棵树上。猎人就这样一次又一次地追着它,猴子疲于奔命。每当猎人在某棵棕榈树的树下发出“呜”的吆喝声时,它就起身逃走;逃来逃去,等到它极度疲惫时,便紧紧抓住一棵棕榈树的嫩叶尖,即使猎人用弓的一端刺它、要捉住它,它也不逃了。巴利
Apicettha evampi yojanā veditabbā – dvattiṃsatālakasmiñhi tālavane makkaṭo paṭivasati. Taṃ gahetukāmo luddo koṭiyaṃ ṭhitatālamūle ṭhatvā ukkuṭṭhimakāsi. Mānajātiko makkaṭo taṃ taṃ tālaṃ laṅghitvā pariyantatāle aṭṭhāsi. Luddo tatthapi gantvā ukkuṭṭhimakāsi. Makkaṭo puna tatheva purimatāle patiṭṭhāsi. So aparāparaṃ anubandhiyamāno kilamanto tassa tasseva tālassa mūle ṭhatvā ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhikāle uṭṭhahitvā gacchanto gacchanto atikilamanto ekassa tālassa makuḷapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā dhanukoṭiyā vijjhitvā gaṇhantopi na palāyati.
这里,三十二个部分就像三十二棵棕榈树;心就像猴子;修行者就像猎人。猎人在棕榈树根部站着发出吆喝声时,那只生性傲慢的猴子逃到最边上那棵树站着——这就像在无始轮回中,心在各种所缘上不断增长,当只是转向“头发”时,就顺着诵习的流向到达并停留在“脑”。猎人在最边上站着发出吆喝声时,猴子又回到近处那棵树——这就像当心转向“脑”时,就顺着诵习的流向到达并停留在“头发”。猴子被反复追赶,疲惫不堪,每当发出吆喝声时就起身逃走——这就像不断作意时,在每一个部分显现之际,念住之后又念住地行进。即使被弓端刺中、被抓住也不逃走——这就像哪个部分显现得更为明显,就在那里加倍作意,从而达到安止。巴利
Tattha dvattiṃsa tālā viya dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā; makkaṭo viya cittaṃ; luddo viya yogāvacaro; luddena tālamūle ṭhatvā ukkuṭṭhikāle mānajātikassa makkaṭassa palāyitvā pariyantakoṭiyaṃ ṭhitakālo viya anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe ca nānārammaṇesu vaḍḍhitacittassa ‘kesā’ti āvajjitamatte sajjhāyasotānusārena gantvā matthaluṅge patiṭṭhānaṃ; pariyantakoṭiyaṃ ṭhatvā ukkuṭṭhe orimakoṭiṃ āgamanakālo viya ‘matthaluṅga’nti āvajjitamatte sajjhāyasotānusārena gantvā kesesu patiṭṭhānaṃ; aparāparaṃ anubandhiyamānassa kilamantassa ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāne uṭṭhānakālo viya manasikarontassa manasikarontassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ koṭṭhāse upaṭṭhahante satiyā patiṭṭhāya patiṭṭhāya gamanaṃ; dhanukoṭiyā vijjhitvā gaṇhantassāpi apalāyanakālo viya yo koṭṭhāso adhikataraṃ upaṭṭhāti, tasmiṃ dviguṇaṃ manasikāraṃ katvā appanāya pāpanaṃ.
在这里,从证得安止的那个时候开始,在其余的身分上,他都能毫不费力地证得安止。因此,应当一再地转向“不净、不净”,一再地作意,一再地思虑、伺察。这样修习的人,四个蕴就以不净为所缘,从而证得安止。前分的心称为遍作和近行,是有寻有伺的,这一切都和前面所说的一样。不过,如果只对某一个身分作意,就只有初禅生起;如果对各自身分分别作意,就会生起三十二个初禅。关于“手中所持的问题”,其情形本来就是这样。巴利
Tattha appanāya pāpitakālato paṭṭhāya sesakoṭṭhāsesu akilamantova appanaṃ pāpessati. Tasmā ‘paṭikūlaṃ paṭikūla’nti punappunaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ samannāharitabbaṃ, takkāhataṃ vitakkāhataṃ kātabbaṃ. Evaṃ karontassa cattāro khandhā paṭikūlārammaṇā honti, appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Pubbabhāgacittāni parikammaupacārasaṅkhātāni savitakkasavicārānīti sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttasadisameva. Ekaṃ pana koṭṭhāsaṃ manasikarontassa ekameva paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattati. Pāṭiyekkaṃ manasikarontassa dvattiṃsa paṭhamajjhānāni nibbattanti. Hatthe gahitapañhāvatthu pākatikameva.
那位比丘亲近、依止、反复练习这个业处之相,不断增长它,一次又一次地去做。所谓“善安立、善确定”,就是把它好好地确定下来。所谓“于外在的身收摄心”,就是这样做之后,把自己的心收摄、安立、导向外在的他人之身。巴利
So taṃ nimittanti so bhikkhu taṃ kammaṭṭhānanimittaṃ. Āsevatīti sevati bhajati. Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti. Bahulīkarotīti punappunaṃ karoti. Svāvatthitaṃ vavatthapetīti suvavatthitaṃ karoti. Bahiddhā kāye cittaṃ upasaṃharatīti evaṃ katvā bahiddhā parassa kāye attano cittaṃ upasaṃharati ṭhapeti peseti.
“有身”是指有这个身体。把心导向内身和外身,就是有时把自己的心导向自己的身体,有时导向他人的身体。之所以说“有身”,是因为这里并不是只指自己的身体,也不是只指他人的身体,所以才这样说。不过在这里,对自己还活着的身体作“不净”的预备修习时,安止和近行都会生起;对他人还活着的身体作意“不净”时,安止和近行都不会生起。难道在十种不净中,这两种不都能生起吗?是的,都能生起。因为十不净是站在非执取的范围来说的,所以在那里安止和近行都能生起。但这个身至念是站在执取的范围来说的,因此在这里这两种都不生起。不过应当知道,这身至念就是名为不净随观的观禅修习。这一品里说了什么?说了止和观。巴利
Atthissa kāyeti atthi assa kāye. Ajjhattabahiddhākāye cittaṃ upasaṃharatīti kālena attano kālena paresaṃ kāye cittaṃ upanāmeti. Atthikāyeti idaṃ yasmā na ekantena attano kāyo nāpi parasseva kāyo adhippeto, tasmā vuttaṃ. Ettha pana attano jīvamānakasarīre ‘paṭikūla’nti parikammaṃ karontassa appanāpi upacārampi jāyati. Parassa jīvamānakasarīre ‘paṭikūla’nti manasikarontassa neva appanā jāyati, na upacāraṃ. Nanu ca dasasu asubhesu ubhayampetaṃ jāyatīti? Āma, jāyati. Tāni hi anupādinnakapakkhe ṭhitāni. Tasmā tattha appanāpi upacārampi jāyati. Idaṃ pana upādinnakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ. Tenevettha ubhayampetaṃ na jāyati. Asubhānupassanāsaṅkhātā pana vipassanābhāvanā hotīti veditabbā. Imasmiṃ pabbe kiṃ kathitanti? Samathavipassanā kathitā.
现在在这里,应当知道这一切都是与作意共通的各种杂项。因为对于这些——巴利
Idānettha evaṃ sabbaṃ manasikārasādhāraṇaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ. Etesañhi –
从相、从特相、从界,然后从空性;
从蕴等开始应当了知,以及关于头发等的判定。巴利
Nimittato lakkhaṇato, dhātuto atha suññato; Khandhādito ca viññeyyo, kesādīnaṃ vinicchayo.
在这里,所谓“从相”来说,三十二身分共有一百六十种相。瑜伽行者依靠这些相,把三十二身分按部分来把握,也就是:头发有颜色相、形状相、方向相、处所相、界限相,这样共有五种相。在毛等其余身分上,也是同样的道理。巴利
Tattha ‘nimittato’ti dvattiṃsākāre saṭṭhisataṃ nimittāni, yesaṃ vasena yogāvacaro dvattiṃsākāraṃ koṭṭhāsato pariggaṇhāti, seyyathidaṃ – kesassa vaṇṇanimittaṃ, saṇṭhānanimittaṃ, disānimittaṃ, okāsanimittaṃ, paricchedanimittanti pañca nimittāni honti. Lomādīsupi eseva nayo.
“以特相”来说:在三十二身分中,共有一百二十八种特相。瑜伽行者就是依据这些特相,对三十二身分作意。比如:头发有坚硬的特相、连结的特相、热特相、撑持特相,这就是四种特相。在毛等其余身分上,道理也一样。巴利
‘Lakkhaṇato’ti dvattiṃsākāre aṭṭhavīsatisataṃ lakkhaṇāni honti, yesaṃ vasena yogāvacaro dvattiṃsākāraṃ lakkhaṇato manasikaroti, seyyathidaṃ – kese thaddhattalakkhaṇaṃ, ābandhattalakkhaṇaṃ, uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ, vitthambhanalakkhaṇanti cattāri lakkhaṇāni honti. Lomādīsupi eseva nayo.
“以界”来说:在三十二身分中,按照“比丘,这个人由四界组成”所说的诸界,共有一百二十八界。瑜伽行者依靠这些界来把握三十二身分,也就是:在头发中,坚硬性是地界,黏结性是水界,温热性是火界,支撑性是风界——这就是四种界。在毛等其余身分中,道理也一样。巴利
‘Dhātuto’ti dvattiṃsākāre ‘‘catudhāturo ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso’’ti vuttāsu dhātūsu aṭṭhavīsatisataṃ dhātuyo honti, yāsaṃ vasena yogāvacaro dvattiṃsākāraṃ dhātuto pariggaṇhāti, seyyathidaṃ – kese kakkhaḷatā pathavīdhātu, ābandhanatā āpodhātu, uṇhatā tejodhātu, vitthambhanatā vāyodhātūti catasso dhātuyo honti. Lomādīsupi eseva nayo.
“以空”来说:在三十二方面中,有九十六种空。瑜伽行者依靠这些空,观三十二方面为空。也就是:头发是空,没有我,没有我所,没有常,没有恒久,没有永恒,没有不变坏的性质。单就头发来说,有我空、我所空、常性空这三种空。在毛等其余方面上,道理也一样。巴利
‘Suññato’ti dvattiṃsākāre channavuti suññatā honti, yāsaṃ vasena yogāvacaro dvattiṃsākāraṃ suññato vipassati, seyyathidaṃ – kesā suññā attena vā attaniyena vā niccena vā dhuvena vā sassatena vā avipariṇāmadhammena vāti. Kese tāva attasuññatā, attaniyasuññatā, niccabhāvasuññatāti tisso suññatā honti. Lomādīsupi eseva nayo.
关于“从蕴等”:在三十二种身体部分中,当按照蕴等来把握头发等时,应当以“头发有几蕴?几处?几界?几谛?几念处?”等这样的方式,在这里了知抉择。巴利
‘Khandhādito’ti dvattiṃsākāre kesādīsu khandhādivasena pariggayhamānesu kesā kati khandhā honti, kati āyatanāni, kati dhātuyo, kati saccāni, kati satipaṭṭhānānītiādinā nayena pettha vinicchayo viññātabbo.
357 357. 像这样,从内在等类别的角度,以三种方式详细说明了身随观之后,现在为了分别解说“安住于身随观,热诚、正知”等语句,开始讲“随观”等词。其中,为了说明通过哪种随观而称为身随观,便说:“其中,什么是随观?就是慧、了知……”等。“热诚”等语句也是同样的道理。巴利
357. Evaṃ ajjhattādibhedato tividhena kāyānupassanaṃ vitthārato dassetvā idāni ‘‘kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno’’tiādīni padāni bhājetvā dassetuṃ anupassītiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yāya anupassanāya kāyānupassī nāma hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ tattha katamā anupassanā? Yā paññā pajānanātiādi vuttaṃ. Ātāpītiādīsupi eseva nayo.
其中,“慧、知……”等词,应当完全按照前面《心生起品注释》里已经说过的道理来理解。“具足”等所有词,都是彼此的同义词。另外,从反复练习的角度说是“具足”,从修习培养的角度说是“善具足”,也就是“等具足”。“已至”和“等至”、“已得”和“等得”,这两对词也是同样的道理。而从多作的角度说,则是“具备”——这里的搭配关系应当这样理解。“以此热诚而具足”等说法,也是同样的道理。巴利
Tattha paññā pajānanātiādīni heṭṭhā cittuppādakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 16) vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. Upetotiādīni sabbāni aññamaññavevacanāni. Apica āsevanavasena upeto, bhāvanāvasena suṭṭhu upetoti samupeto. Upāgato samupāgato, upapanno sampannoti imesupi dvīsu dukesu ayameva nayo. Bahulīkāravasena pana samannāgatoti evamettha yojanā veditabbā. Iminā ātāpena upetoti ādīsupi eseva nayo.
在“住”这个词上,没有先问“这里什么是住”,而是直接依着补特伽罗来施设教说,所以说了“行”等话。它的意思是:因为具备四种威仪中的某一种,所以叫“行”;以这四种威仪让身体像车一样运转,所以叫“转”;用一种威仪压过另一种威仪的苦,以长久维持的方式保护身体,所以叫“护”;不停留在一种威仪上,而轮换于一切威仪,所以叫“续”;以种种威仪让身体这样那样地维持下去,所以叫“存续”;因为长久地运转,所以叫“行”;以威仪打断威仪而维持生命,所以叫“住”。巴利
Viharatīti pade ‘tattha katamo vihāro’ti pucchaṃ akatvā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya desento iriyatītiādimāha. Tassattho – catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ aññatarasamaṅgībhāvato iriyati. Tehi iriyāpathacatukkehi kāyasakaṭavattanena vattati. Ekaṃ iriyāpathadukkhaṃ aparena iriyāpathena bādhitvā ciraṭṭhitikabhāvena sarīrakkhanato pāleti. Ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe asaṇṭhahitvā sabbiriyāpathavatanato yapeti. Tena tena iriyāpathena tathā tathā kāyassa yāpanato yāpeti. Cirakālavattāpanato carati. Iriyāpathena iriyāpathaṃ vicchinditvā jīvitaharaṇato viharati.
362 这个身体本身就是世间:当他在这个身体上安住于身随观时,这个身体就以坏散、毁坏的含义而称为世间。又因为当他在身体上断除贪与忧时,在受等上面也同样断除,所以说五取蕴也是世间。巴利
362.Sveva kāyo lokoti yasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassī viharati, sveva kāyo lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko. Yasmā panassa kāye pahīyamānaṃ abhijjhādomanassaṃ vedanādīsupi pahīyati eva, tasmā pañcapi upādānakkhandhā lokoti vuttaṃ.
在“寂静”等词中:由于止息而寂静,所以叫“寂静”。由于修习而平息,所以叫“平息”。由于遍知所依而不再生起、止息下来,所以叫“止息”。已经达到名为灭尽的境地,所以叫“已达灭”。因为一再再生被阻断,极度地达到了灭尽,所以叫“极已达灭”。“投入”就是被摧毁,也有安立在不再生起状态中的意思。“遍投入”就是被彻底摧毁,也有极度安立在不再生起状态中的意思。就像使它们不再反复流漏那样,因为已经干涸,所以叫“干涸”;彻底干涸,就是“遍干涸”,意思是使之枯干。“已令边际离”就是已经达到尽头。在这里应当知道:以随观为业处而安住,是业处修行者的护身;以热忱为正精进;以念和正知为守护业处的方法;或者,以念依身随观所得的定,以正知为观,以断除贪忧为修习的果,这样已经说了。巴利
Santātiādīsupi nirodhavasena santatāya santā. Bhāvanāya samitattā samitā. Vatthupariññāya appavattivūpasamavasena vūpasantā. Nirodhasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ gatāti atthaṅgatā. Punappunaṃ nibbattiyā paṭibāhitattā ativiya atthaṃ gatāti abbhatthaṅgatā. Appitāti vināsitā, appavattiyaṃ ṭhapitātipi attho. Byappitāti suvināsitā, ativiya appavattiyaṃ ṭhapitātipi attho. Yathā puna na anvassavanti evaṃ sositattā sositā. Suṭṭhu sositāti visositā, sukkhāpitāti attho. Vigatantā katāti byantī katā. Ettha ca anupassanāya kammaṭṭhānavihārena kammaṭṭhānikassa kāyapariharaṇaṃ, ātāpena sammappadhānaṃ, satisampajaññena kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇūpāyo; satiyā vā kāyānupassanāvasena paṭiladdho samatho, sampajaññena vipassanā, abhijjhādomanassavinayena bhāvanāphalaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
受随观的详细解释巴利
Vedanānupassanāniddesavaṇṇanā
363 在受随观的解说里,也应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。不过在“感受乐受”等句子中,“乐受”是指身体的乐受或心理的乐受;感受乐受时,他了知“我感受乐受”,这就是它的意思。当然,连仰卧的婴儿在吮奶等时候感受乐受,也知道“我们感受乐受”,但这里说的并不是那种了知。因为那种了知不能舍断有情的执取,不能破除有情的想,也不成为业处或念处的修习。而这位比丘的了知,能舍断有情的执取,破除有情的想,既是业处,也是念处的修习。这是针对“谁在感受?是谁的受?以什么为因有受?”这样正知感受而说的。巴利
363. Vedanānupassanāniddesepi heṭṭhā vuttasadisaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamānotiādīsu pana sukhaṃ vedananti kāyikaṃ vā cetasikaṃ vā sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘ahaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānātīti attho. Tattha kāmaṃ uttānaseyyakāpi dārakā thaññapivanādikāle sukhaṃ vedayamānā ‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmā’ti pajānanti, na panetaṃ evarūpaṃ jānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evarūpañhi jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ nappajahati, sattasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hoti. Imassa pana bhikkhuno jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ pajahati, sattasaññaṃ ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānañceva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā ca hoti. ‘Idañhi ko vedayati, kassa vedanā, kiṃ kāraṇā vedanā’ti evaṃ sampajānavediyanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
在这里,是谁在感受呢?没有任何众生或人在感受。那么,受是谁的呢?受不属于任何众生或人。受是以什么为因的呢?这受是以所依和所缘为条件的。因此,他这样了知:以种种乐等所依和所缘为条件,只有受本身在感受;而依据这受的生起活动,才有“我在感受”这种假名施设。应当知道,这样以所依和所缘为条件,只有受本身在感受,他如此观察,了知“我在感受乐受”,就像心拉山的那位长老一样。巴利
Tattha ko vedayatīti? Na koci satto vā puggalo vā vedayati. Kassa vedanāti? Na kassaci sattassa vā puggalassa vā vedanā. Kiṃ kāraṇā vedanāti? Vatthuārammaṇā ca panesā vedanā. Tasmā esa evaṃ pajānāti – ‘taṃ taṃ sukhādīnaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayati; taṃ pana vedanāpavattiṃ upādāya ‘ahaṃ vedayāmī’ti vohāramattaṃ hotī’ti. Evaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatīti sallakkhento ‘esa sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānātīti veditabbo, cittalapabbate aññataro thero viya.
据说,那位长老身体不舒服的时候,被强烈的疼痛逼得不断呻吟,翻来覆去。一个年轻比丘问他:“尊者,您到底是哪里在痛?”长老回答:“贤友,并没有什么单独存在的痛处;只是以身体和所缘为条件,受本身在感受而已。”年轻比丘说:“尊者,从您这样了知的那一刻起,就应该忍耐下去。”长老说:“贤友,我在忍耐。”年轻比丘又说:“尊者,忍耐更好。”长老就忍了下来。那阵风大一直撕裂到心脏,肠腑在床铺上堆成了一团。长老给那个年轻比丘看,说:“贤友,这样的忍耐够了吧?”年轻比丘沉默不语。长老于是调动精进与定,连同无碍解一起,证得阿罗汉果,成为等首者,然后般涅槃了。巴利
Thero kira aphāsukakāle balavavedanāya nitthunanto aparāparaṃ parivattati. Tameko daharo āha – ‘‘kataraṃ vo, bhante, ṭhānaṃ rujatī’’ti? ‘‘Āvuso, pāṭiyekkaṃ rujanaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi; vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ jānanakālato paṭṭhāya adhivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati no, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Adhivāsemi, āvuso’’ti. ‘‘Adhivāsanā, bhante, seyyo’’ti. Thero adhivāsesi. Vāto yāva hadayā phālesi. Mañcake antāni rāsīkatāni ahesuṃ. Thero daharassa dassesi – ‘‘vaṭṭatāvuso, ettakā adhivāsanā’’ti? Daharo tuṇhī ahosi. Thero vīriyasamādhiṃ yojetvā sahapaṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitvā samasīsī hutvā parinibbāyi.
就像对乐受一样,对苦受……乃至他感受无欲染的不苦不乐受时,也清楚地知道:我感受无欲染的不苦不乐受。世尊就这样开示了色业处之后,接着开示非色业处,是以受为切入点来讲的。业处有两种:色业处和非色业处,也可以叫做色摄受和非色摄受。其中,世尊开示色业处时,是以简略作意或详细作意的方式来讲四界差别。这两种方式在《清净道论》里都已经全面说明了。巴利
Yathā ca sukhaṃ, evaṃ dukkhaṃ…pe… nirāmisaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘nirāmisaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānāti. Iti bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena kathesi. Duvidhañhi kammaṭṭhānaṃ – rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ arūpakammaṭṭhānañca; rūpapariggaho arūpapariggahotipi etadeva vuccati. Tattha bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento saṅkhepamanasikāravasena vā vitthāramanasikāravasena vā catudhātuvavatthānaṃ kathesi. Tadubhayampi visuddhimagge sabbākārato dassitameva.
不过,在讲非色业处的时候,大多数情况下是依受来讲的。因为对非色业处的投入有三种方式:依触、依受、依心。怎么讲呢?有些人不管是简略地还是详细地把握了色业处,当心和心所最初投向那个所缘时,生起的触碰触那个所缘,触就变得明显。有些人则是领受那个所缘而生起的受变得明显。有些人则是把握那个所缘而了知的识变得明显。巴利
Arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ pana kathento yebhuyyena vedanāvasena kathesi. Tividho hi arūpakammaṭṭhāne abhiniveso – phassavasena, vedanāvasena, cittavasenāti. Kathaṃ? Ekaccassa hi saṃkhittena vā vitthārena vā pariggahite rūpakammaṭṭhāne tasmiṃ ārammaṇe cittacetasikānaṃ paṭhamābhinipāto taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusanto uppajjamāno phasso pākaṭo hoti. Ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ anubhavantī uppajjamānā vedanā pākaṭā hoti. Ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā vijānantaṃ uppajjamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti.
在这里,如果一个人的触变得明显,他就会这样整体把握触等五法:“并不是只有触生起;和它一起,领受同一个所缘的受也生起,认取同一个所缘的想也生起,作意思的思也生起,了别同一个所缘的识也生起。”如果一个人的受变得明显,他也会这样整体把握触等五法:“并不是只有受生起;和它一起,为同一个所缘所触的触也生起,认取同一个所缘的想也生起,作意思的思也生起,了别同一个所缘的识也生起。”如果一个人的识变得明显,他也会这样整体把握触等五法:“并不是只有识生起;和它一起,为同一个所缘所触的触也生起,领受同一个所缘的受也生起,认取同一个所缘的想也生起,作意思的思也生起。”巴利
Tattha yassa phasso pākaṭo hoti, sopi ‘na kevalaṃ phassova uppajjati; tena saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ anubhavamānā vedanāpi uppajjati, sañjānamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi, vijānanamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa vedanā pākaṭā hoti, sopi ‘na kevalaṃ vedanāva uppajjati; tāya saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, sañjānanamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi, vijānanamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, sopi ‘na kevalaṃ viññāṇameva uppajjati; tena saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, anubhavamānā vedanāpi, sañjānanamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi uppajjatī’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti.
他观察“这些以触为第五的法,是依靠什么而存在的”,于是清楚了“它们是依靠所依而存在的”。所谓所依,就是业所生的身体;经里就是针对这个而说:“而我的这个识,就依在这里,系在这里。”(长部1.235)从义理上说,所依就是诸界以及所造色。这样,他在这里看到:所依是色,以触为第五的诸法是名,这就只是名色。而这里的色就是色蕴,名就是四个无色蕴,所以只是五蕴而已。因为,离开了名色的五蕴,或者离开了五蕴的名色,都是不存在的。巴利
So ‘ime phassapañcamakā dhammā kiṃnissitā’ti upadhārento ‘vatthunissitā’ti pajānāti. Vatthu nāma karajakāyo; yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idañca pana me viññāṇaṃ etthasitaṃ, etthapaṭibaddha’’nti (dī. ni. 1.235). So atthato bhūtāni ceva upādārūpāni ca. Evamettha vatthu rūpaṃ, phassapañcamakā nāmanti nāmarūpameva passati. Rūpañcettha rūpakkhandho, nāmaṃ cattāro arūpino khandhāti pañcakkhandhamattaṃ hoti. Nāmarūpavinimuttā hi pañcakkhandhā pañcakkhandhavinimuttaṃ vā nāmarūpaṃ natthi.
他这样进一步审察:“这些五蕴是以什么为因的?”这时他见到:“是以无明等为因的。”由此他明白:这里只有缘以及缘所生之法,并没有另一个众生或人,纯粹只是诸行的聚集而已。于是,他依有缘的名色,把无常、苦、无我这三相安立起来,按照观修的次第,反复观察“无常、苦、无我”而安住。他怀着“就在今天,就在今天”证悟的期望,在那样的一天,得到适宜的时节、适宜的人、适宜的食物或适宜闻法的机会,就以一跏趺坐坐下后不再起身,使观修达到顶点,安立在阿拉汉果上。这样,为这三种人所说的业处,就一直开示到阿拉汉果。巴利
So ‘ime pañcakkhandhā kiṃhetukā’ti upaparikkhanto ‘avijjādihetukā’ti passati; tato paccayo ceva paccayuppannañca idaṃ; añño satto vā puggalo vā natthi; suddhasaṅkhārapuñjamattamevāti sappaccayanāmarūpavasenava tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā ‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’ti sammasanto vicarati. So ‘ajja ajjā’ti paṭivedhaṃ ākaṅkhamāno tathārūpe divase utusappāyaṃ, puggalasappāyaṃ, bhojanasappāyaṃ, dhammasavanasappāyaṃ vā labhitvā ekapallaṅkena nisinnova vipassanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāti. Evaṃ imesaṃ tiṇṇampi janānaṃ yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti.
在这里,世尊开示无色业处时,是依受来说的。因为如果依触或依识来说,就不清楚,像黑暗一样;但依受来说,就清楚了。为什么?因为受的生起很明显。乐受和苦受的生起确实明显。当乐生起时,它震动、揉压、遍满、灌注整个身体,就像让人吃下百次提炼的酥油,像涂上百次煮过的油,像用一千壶水浇灭灼热一样,让人口中发出“啊,快乐!啊,快乐!”的声音,就这样生起。当苦生起时,它震动、揉压、遍满、灌注整个身体,就像插入烧红的犁头,像浇上熔化的铜汁,像在干草丛生的林中投入燃烧的柴捆一样,让人哭喊“啊,痛苦!啊,痛苦!”就这样生起。因此,苦受和乐受的生起是明显的。巴利
Idha pana bhagavā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena kathesi. Phassavasena vā hi viññāṇavasena vā kathiyamānaṃ na pākaṭaṃ hoti, andhakāraṃ viya khāyati. Vedanāvasena pana pākaṭaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Vedanānaṃ uppattipākaṭatāya. Sukhadukkhavedanānañhi uppatti pākaṭā. Yadā sukhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ khobhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ abhisandayamānaṃ satadhotasappiṃ khādāpayantaṃ viya, satapākatelaṃ makkhāpayamānaṃ viya, udakaghaṭasahassena pariḷāhaṃ nibbāpayamānaṃ viya, ‘aho sukhaṃ! Aho sukhanti’! Vācaṃ nicchārayamānameva uppajjati. Yadā dukkhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ khobhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ abhisandayamānaṃ tattaphālaṃ pavesentaṃ viya, vilīnatambalohena āsiñcantaṃ viya, sukkhatiṇavanappatimhi araññe dāruukkākalāpaṃ pakkhipamānaṃ viya ‘aho dukkhaṃ! Aho dukkhanti!’ Vippalāpayamānameva uppajjati. Iti sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ uppatti pākaṭā hoti.
不苦不乐受则微细难辨,像处在黑暗中一样,不明显。当苦与乐消失时,它遮遣可意与不可意,呈现为中舍的状态,也就是不苦不乐受——对于依理路来把握它的人,它就变得清晰。就像什么呢?好比猎人追踪一头逃上平顶岩石的鹿,他沿着鹿的踪迹走,在平顶岩石的这一侧和那一侧都看到了脚印,虽然看不到岩石中间有脚印,但他依理路知道:“鹿从这里上去,从那里下来,在中间的平顶岩石上,一定是经过这个地段走的。”同样,登上处的脚印清清楚楚,乐受的生起也清清楚楚;下去处的脚印清清楚楚,苦受的生起也清清楚楚。就像凭“从这里上去,从这里下来,在中间是这样走过的”这个理路来把握一样,当苦与乐消失时,以遮遣可意与不可意而成为中舍状态的不苦不乐受,对于依理路来把握它的人,就清清楚楚。巴利
Adukkhamasukhā pana duddīpanā andhakārā avibhūtā. Sā sukhadukkhānaṃ apagame sātāsātapaṭikkhepavasena majjhattākārabhūtā adukkhamasukhā vedanāti nayato gaṇhantassa pākaṭā hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Antarā piṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ āruhitvā palāyantassa migassa anupathaṃ gacchanto migaluddako piṭṭhipāsāṇassa orabhāge aparabhāgepi padaṃ disvā majjhe apassantopi ‘ito āruḷho, ito oruḷho, majjhe piṭṭhipāsāṇe iminā padesena gato bhavissatī’ti nayato jānāti. Evaṃ āruḷhaṭṭhāne padaṃ viya hi sukhāya vedanāya uppatti pākaṭā hoti; oruḷhaṭṭhāne padaṃ viya dukkhāya vedanāya uppatti pākaṭā hoti. ‘Ito āruḷho, ito oruḷho, majjhe evaṃ gato’ti nayato gahaṇaṃ viya sukhadukkhānaṃ apagame sātāsātapaṭikkhepavasena majjhattākārabhūtā adukkhamasukhā vedanāti nayato gaṇhantassa pākaṭā hoti.
世尊这样先讲了色业处,之后讲无色业处时,就以受为切入点来转接和指示。不只是在这里这样指示,在长部里的《大因缘经》《帝释问经》《大念处经》,中部里的《念处经》《小渴爱灭尽经》《大渴爱灭尽经》《小有明经》《大有明经》《赖吒和罗经》《摩犍提经》《界分别经》《不动适宜经》,以及相应部里的《小因缘经》《树譬喻经》《遍寻思经》,乃至整部《受相应》等许多经典中,都是先讲色业处,之后讲无色业处时,以受为切入点来转接和指示。正如在那些经典中一样,在这《念处分别》里,也是先讲色业处,之后讲无色业处时,以受为切入点来转接和指示。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena vinivattetvā dassesi; na kevalañca idheva evaṃ dasseti, dīghanikāyamhi mahānidāne, sakkapañhe, mahāsatipaṭṭhāne , majjhimanikāyamhi satipaṭṭhāne ca cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhaye, mahātaṇhāsaṅkhaye, cūḷavedalle, mahāvedalle, raṭṭhapālasutte, māgaṇḍiyasutte, dhātuvibhaṅge, āneñjasappāye, saṃyuttanikāyamhi cūḷanidānasutte, rukkhopame, parivīmaṃsanasutte, sakale vedanāsaṃyutteti evaṃ anekesu suttesu paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena vinivattetvā dassesi. Yathā ca tesu tesu, evaṃ imasmimpi satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅge paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena vinivattetvā dassesi.
在这里,对于“乐受”等说法,还有另一种了知的方式:他了知“我感受乐受”。也就是说,在感受乐受的那个刹那,因为苦受不存在,正在感受乐受的人就了知“我感受乐受”。由于先前存在过的苦受现在不存在,而现在的乐受在此之前也不存在,所以他就此成为正知者:受确实是无常的、不稳固的、会变坏的。世尊也这样说过:巴利
Tattha sukhaṃ vedanantiādīsu ayaṃ aparopi pajānanapariyāyo – sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmīti pajānātīti sukhavedanākkhaṇe dukkhāya vedanāya abhāvato sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. Tena yā pubbe bhūtapubbā dukkhā vedanā, tassā idāni abhāvato imissā ca sukhāya ito paṭhamaṃ abhāvato vedanā nāma aniccā addhuvā vipariṇāmadhammāti itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
火种,当一个人感受乐受的时候,那时他既不感受苦受,也不感受不苦不乐受,只感受乐受。火种,当一个人感受苦受的时候……(中略)……当一个人感受不苦不乐受的时候,那时他既不感受乐受,也不感受苦受,只感受不苦不乐受。火种,乐受确实是无常的、有为的、缘生的、灭尽法、衰灭法、离欲法、止灭法。苦受也确实……(中略)……火种,不苦不乐受也确实是无常的、有为的……(中略)……止灭法。火种,多闻圣弟子这样观察,就对乐受厌离,对苦受厌离,对不苦不乐受厌离;因为厌离而离染,因为离染而解脱;在解脱时,生起“已解脱”的智,他了知:生已尽,梵行已立,应作已作,不受后有。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ, aggivessana, samaye sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, neva tasmiṃ samaye dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, na adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, sukhaṃyeva tasmiṃ samaye vedanaṃ vedeti. Yasmiṃ , aggivessana, samaye dukkhaṃ…pe… adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, neva tasmiṃ samaye sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, na dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, adukkhamasukhaṃyeva tasmiṃ samaye vedanaṃ vedeti. Sukhāpi kho, aggivessana , vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā. Dukkhāpi kho…pe… adukkhamasukhāpi kho, aggivessana, vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā…pe… nirodhadhammā. Evaṃ passaṃ, aggivessana, sutavā ariyasāvako sukhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, dukkhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, adukkhamasukhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, nibbindaṃ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati, vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hoti; ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ, nāparaṃ itthattāyā’ti pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.205).
在“有染的乐”等说法中,“有染的乐”是指依止五种欲乐、与居家相应的六种喜受;“无染的乐”是指与出离相应的六种喜受;“有染的苦”是指与居家相应的六种忧受;“无染的苦”是指与出离相应的六种忧受;“有染的不苦不乐”是指与居家相应的六种舍受;“无染的不苦不乐”是指与出离相应的六种舍受。这些的区分在上分五十经的圣典中(《中部》3.304等)已经出现过。“那即是它的相”意思是,那即是受的相。“于外部的受”是指他人的受。“感受乐受”是指了知他人正在感受乐受。“内与外”是指有时把心投向自己的受,有时投向他人的受。在这个段落中,因为既不限定为自己,也不限定为他人,所以为了只显示对受的把握,才说“在此,比丘了知乐受为乐受”等。这里其余的内容浅显易懂。然而,在这一品中只说了纯粹的观禅。巴利
Sāmisaṃvā sukhantiādīsu sāmisā sukhā nāma pañcakāmaguṇāmisanissitā cha gehassitasomanassavedanā; nirāmisā sukhā nāma cha nekkhammassitasomanassavedanā; sāmisā dukkhā nāma cha gehassitadomanassavedanā; nirāmisā dukkhā nāma cha nekkhammassitadomanassavedanā; sāmisā adukkhamasukhā nāma cha gehasitaupekkhāvedanā; nirāmisā adukkhamasukhā nāma cha nekkhammassitaupekkhāvedanā. Tāsaṃ vibhāgo uparipaṇṇāse pāḷiyaṃ (ma. ni. 3.304 ādayo) āgatoyeva. So taṃ nimittanti so taṃ vedanānimittaṃ. Bahiddhā vedanāsūti parapuggalassa vedanāsu. Sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamānanti parapuggalaṃ sukhavedanaṃ vedayamānaṃ. Ajjhattabahiddhāti kālena attano kālena parassa vedanāsu cittaṃ upasaṃharati. Imasmiṃ vāre yasmā neva attā, na paro niyamito; tasmā vedanāpariggahamattameva dassetuṃ ‘‘idha bhikkhu sukhaṃ vedanaṃ sukhā vedanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Imasmiṃ pana pabbe suddhavipassanāva kathitāti.
心随观的解说注释巴利
Cittānupassanāniddesavaṇṇanā
365 在“心随观”的解说中,下面所说的内容也应当依照前面所讲的方式来了知。在“有贪的心”等语句里,“有贪”是指八种与贪俱行的心。“离贪”是指世间的善心和无记心。不过,因为这里是观察思惟,而不是法的汇集,所以在这里,即使是一个词条中,也不能得出出世间心。由于这些心与贪等一起生起、以断除为同一作用而被断除,所以在两个词条中都不能直接获得,因此没有采纳。其余四种不善心,既不归入前一个词条,也不归入后一个词条。“有嗔”是指两种与忧俱行的心。“离嗔”是指世间的善心和无记心。其余十种不善心,既不归入前一个词条,也不归入后一个词条。“有痴”是指与疑相应和与掉举相应的两种心。不过,因为痴在一切不善心中都会生起,所以其余的在这里也同样被包含进来。因为就在这一对中,十二种不善心已经被完全涵盖。“离痴”是指世间的善心和无记心。“昏沉”是指被惛沉睡眠所侵袭的心,这叫作“蜷缩的心”。“散乱”是指与掉举俱行的心,这叫作“涣散的心”。巴利
365. Cittānupassanāniddesepi heṭṭhā vuttasadisaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Sarāgaṃ vā cittantiādīsu pana sarāganti aṭṭhavidhaṃ lobhasahagataṃ. Vītarāganti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Idaṃ pana yasmā sammasanaṃ na dhammasamodhānaṃ, tasmā idha ekapadepi lokuttaraṃ na labbhati. Yasmā pahānekaṭṭhavasena rāgādīhi saha vattanti pahīyanti, tasmā dvīsu padesu nippariyāyena na labbhantīti na gahitāni. Sesāni cattāri akusalacittāni neva purimapadaṃ, na pacchimapadaṃ bhajanti. Sadosanti duvidhaṃ domanassasahagataṃ. Vītadosanti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Sesāni dasa akusalacittāni neva purimapadaṃ, na pacchimapadaṃ bhajanti. Samohanti vicikicchāsahagatañceva uddhaccasahagatañcāti duvidhaṃ. Yasmā pana moho sabbākusalesu uppajjati, tasmā sesānipi idha vaṭṭanti eva. Imasmiṃ yeva hi duke dvādasākusalacittāni pariyādiṇṇānīti. Vītamohanti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Saṃkhittanti thinamiddhānupatitaṃ. Etañhi saṅkuṭitacittaṃ nāma. Vikkhittanti uddhaccasahagataṃ. Etañhi pasaṭacittaṃ nāma.
“广大”是指色界和无色界的心。“不广大”是指欲界的心。“有上”是指欲界的心。“无上”是指色界和无色界的心。在这两者当中,色界的心属于“有上”,只有无色界的心才是“无上”。“有定”是指有安止定或近行定的心。“无定”是指两种定都没有的心。“解脱”是指通过彼分断和镇伏断而解脱的心。“未解脱”是指两种解脱都没有的心;不过,正断解脱、寂止解脱和出离解脱在这里根本不适用。“有贪的心”就是他的心有贪。其余的内容因为前面已经说过,所以很容易明白。在这一品里,所讲的也只是纯粹的观禅。巴利
Mahaggatanti rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacarañca. Amahaggatanti kāmāvacaraṃ. Sauttaranti kāmāvacaraṃ. Anuttaranti rūpāvacarañca arūpāvacarañca. Tatrāpi sauttaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ, anuttaraṃ arūpāvacarameva. Samāhitanti yassa appanāsamādhi upacārasamādhi vā atthi. Asamāhitanti ubhayasamādhivirahitaṃ. Vimuttanti tadaṅgavikkhambhanavimuttīhi vinimuttaṃ. Avimuttanti ubhayavimuttirahitaṃ; samucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttīnaṃ pana idha okāsova natthi. Sarāgamassa cittanti sarāgaṃ assa cittaṃ. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānatthameva. Imasmimpi pabbe suddhavipassanāva kathitāti.
法随观的解说注释巴利
Dhammānupassanāniddesavaṇṇanā
盖的解说巴利
Nīvaraṇapabbavaṇṇanā
367 到这一步为止,因为身随观只讲了色蕴的把握,受随观只讲了受蕴的把握,心随观只讲了识蕴的把握,所以现在为了以相应法为纲,也讲想蕴和行蕴的把握,在开示法随观时,就说了“比丘如何”等话。其中,“存在”是指由于经常现起而存在。“不存在”是指由于不现起,或者由于已被断除而不存在。“以及如何”是指以什么原因欲贪生起。“他也了知那”是指他也了知那个原因。按照这个方法,应当理解所有句子中的含义。巴利
367. Ettāvatā yasmā kāyānupassanāya rūpakkhandhapariggahova kathito, vedanānupassanāya vedanākkhandhapariggahova cittānupassanāya viññāṇakkhandhapariggahova tasmā idāni sampayuttadhammasīsena saññāsaṅkhārakkhandhapariggahampi kathetuṃ dhammānupassanaṃ dassento kathañca bhikkhūtiādimāha. Tattha santanti abhiṇhasamudācāravasena saṃvijjamānaṃ. Asantanti asamudācāravasena vā pahīnattā vā avijjamānaṃ. Yathā cāti yena kāraṇena kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti. Tañca pajānātīti tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
在这里,由于不如理作意于净相,欲贪就生起。所谓净相,就是净本身是净相,净的所缘也是净相。所谓不如理作意,就是不合宜的作意、走上歧途的作意,也就是把无常当作常、把苦当作乐、把无我当作我、把不净当作净来作意。当人对此反复不断地修习、推动它时,欲贪就会生起。因此,世尊说:巴利
Tattha subhanimitte ayonisomanasikārena kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti. Subhanimittaṃ nāma subhampi subhanimittaṃ, subhārammaṇampi subhanimittaṃ. Ayonisomanasikāro nāma anupāyamanasikāro uppathamanasikāro, anicce niccanti vā dukkhe sukhanti vā anattani attāti vā asubhe subhanti vā manasikāro. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato kāmacchando uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,有净相这回事。在那里,频繁地不如理作意——这就是让还没生起的欲贪得以生起的食,也是让已经生起的欲贪变得更大、更广的食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, subhanimittaṃ. Tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
不过,对于不净相,通过如理作意,欲贪就会被断除。所谓不净相,不净本身就是不净相,以不净为所缘的也是不净相。所谓如理作意,就是善巧的作意、正确的作意,也就是:在无常的事物上作意“无常”,在苦的事物上作意“苦”,在无我的事物上作意“无我”,在不净的事物上作意“不净”。当人不断地这样修习时,欲贪就被断除了。因此,世尊说:巴利
Asubhanimitte pana yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Asubhanimittaṃ nāma asubhampi asubhanimittaṃ, asubhārammaṇampi asubhanimittaṃ. Yonisomanasikāro nāma upāyamanasikāro pathamanasikāro, anicce aniccanti vā dukkhe dukkhanti vā anattani anattāti vā asubhe asubhanti vā manasikāro. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato kāmacchando pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,存在不净相。在那里,反复进行如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的欲贪生起的非食,也是让已生起的欲贪进一步增长、扩大的非食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, asubhanimittaṃ. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamanāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除欲贪:取不净相、修习不净、守护根门、饮食知量、亲近善友、适当的言谈。因为,取十种不净相的人能断除欲贪,修习不净的人也能;守护根门、闭根门的人也能;在还剩四五口食物时,就喝水维持身体、对饮食知量的人也能。因此说:巴利
Apica cha dhammā kāmacchandassa pahānāya saṃvattanti – asubhanimittassa uggaho, asubhabhāvanānuyogo, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Dasavidhañhi asubhanimittaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi kāmacchando pahīyati, bhāventassāpi; indriyesu pihitadvārassāpi ; catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ ālopānaṃ okāse sati udakaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlatāya bhojane mattaññunopi. Tena vuttaṃ –
四五口饭不吃,应当喝水;
这足以让发勤精进的比丘安住于安乐了。巴利
‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
就像从事不净业处帝须长老那样,对于乐于修习不净观、亲近善知识的人,欲贪也会被断除;在行住坐卧等日常活动中,依靠与十种不净相关的适当谈论,欲贪也能被断除。因此说“有六种法有助于断除欲贪”。然而,对于通过这六种法已经断除欲贪的人,他能了知:这欲贪在未来将因阿罗汉道而不再生起。巴利
Asubhakammikatissattherasadise asubhabhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi kāmacchando pahīyati; ṭhānanisajjādīsu dasaasubhanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā kāmacchandassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa kāmacchandassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
而对嗔恚相不如理作意,嗔恚就会生起。这里,嗔恚本身就是嗔恚相;嗔恚的所缘也是嗔恚相。不如理作意在一切情况下都是同一个特征。当人于那个相上反复地让不如理作意运转,嗔恚就会生起。因此世尊说:巴利
Paṭighanimitte ayonisomanasikārena pana byāpādassa uppādo hoti. Tattha paṭighampi paṭighanimittaṃ nāma; paṭighārammaṇampi paṭighanimittaṃ. Ayonisomanasikāro sabbattha ekalakkhaṇova. Taṃ tasmiṃ nimitte bahulaṃ pavattayato byāpādo uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,存在嗔恚相。在那里,频繁地不如理作意——这就是让尚未生起的嗔恚得以生起、让已经生起的嗔恚进一步增长扩大的食物。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, paṭighanimittaṃ. Tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā byāpādassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā byāpādassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
不过,依靠慈心解脱和如理作意,嗔恚就会被断除。这里说到“慈”的时候,安止定和近行定都算;“心解脱”则只指安止定。如理作意就是前面说过的那个特征。不断在那上面修习它,嗔恚就被断除了。因此世尊说:巴利
Mettāya pana cetovimuttiyā yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Tattha mettāti vutte appanāpi upacāropi vaṭṭati; cetovimuttīti appanāva. Yonisomanasikāro vuttalakkhaṇova. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato byāpādo pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,存在慈心解脱。在那里,反复如理作意——这就是让尚未生起的嗔恚生起的食物,也是让已经生起的嗔恚变得更多、更广大的食物。巴利
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, mettācetovimutti. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā byāpādassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā byāpādassa bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232 thokaṃ visadisaṃ).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除嗔恨:学习慈心的相、投入修习慈心、反复省察众生都有自己的业、多作思择、亲近善知识、说适当的话。因为,不论是以限定范围、不限定范围,还是以遍满各个方向的方式中的哪一种来学习慈心,嗔恨都会被断除;以限定、不限定、遍满各个方向的方式修习慈心,嗔恨也会被断除。
要这样省察:“你对这个人发火,能有什么用?你能破坏他的戒等吗?你难道不是随着自己的业而来,也会随着自己的业而去吗?对别人发怒,就像拿起烧红的炭、烧热的铁棒、粪便等,想要去打别人一样。这个人对你发火,又能怎样?他能破坏你的戒等吗?他也是随着自己的业而来,随着自己的业而去;这份愤怒就像没被接受的赠礼,像逆风撒出去的尘土,只会落回他自己头上。”
像这样省察自己和别人都有各自的业,或者省察双方都有各自的业之后,安住在思择中的人;以及像马护长老那样乐于修习慈心、亲近善知识的人,嗔恨都会被断除。在站立、坐下等各种情况下,依靠与慈心相应、适当的话语,嗔恨也会被断除。因此说“有六种法能帮助断除嗔恨”。而他已经断除了这六种法所断的嗔恨之后,就能了知:未来它将由不还道而不再生起。巴利
Apica cha dhammā byāpādassa pahānāya saṃvattanti – mettānimittassa uggaho, mettābhāvanānuyogo, kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇā, paṭisaṅkhānabahulīkatā , kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Odissakānodissakadisāpharaṇānañhi aññataravasena mettaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi byāpādo pahīyati. Odhiso anodhiso disāpharaṇavasena mettaṃ bhāventassāpi. ‘Tvaṃ etassa kuddho kiṃ karissasi, kimassa sīlādīni vināsetuṃ sakkhissasi? Nanu tvaṃ attano kammena āgantvā attano kammeneva gamissasi? Parassa kujjhanaṃ nāma vītaccitaṅgāratattaayosalākagūthādīni gahetvā parassa paharitukāmatāsadisaṃ hoti. Esopi tava kuddho kiṃ karissati? Kiṃ te sīlādīni vināsetuṃ sakkhissati? Esa attano kammenāgantvā attano kammeneva gamissati; appaṭicchitapaheṇakaṃ viya paṭivātakhittarajomuṭṭhi viya ca etassevesa kodho matthake patissatī’ti. Evaṃ attano ca parassa ca kammassakataṃ paccavekkhatopi, ubhayakammassakataṃ paccavekkhitvā paṭisaṅkhāne ṭhitassāpi, assaguttattherasadise mettābhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi byāpādo pahīyati; ṭhānanisajjādīsu mettānissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā byāpādassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa byāpādassa anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
在不乐等项中,由于不如理作意,昏沉睡眠就产生了。所谓不乐,就是厌倦。所谓懈怠,就是身体的懒惰。所谓伸懒腰,就是身体的伸展弯曲。所谓食后昏沉,就是吃饭后的昏昧和燥热。所谓心的退缩,就是心萎缩的状态。对于这些不乐等状态,如果反复不断地作不如理作意,昏沉睡眠就会生起。因此世尊说:巴利
Aratītiādīsu ayonisomanasikārena thinamiddhassa uppādo hoti. Arati nāma ukkaṇṭhitatā. Tandī nāma kāyālasiyatā. Vijambhikā nāma kāyavināmanā. Bhattasammado nāma bhattamucchā bhattapariḷāho. Cetaso līnattaṃ nāma cittassa līnākāro. Imesu aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato thinamiddhaṃ uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,存在不乐、懈怠、伸懒腰、食后昏沉以及心的退缩。其中,反复不如理作意,就是使尚未生起的昏沉睡眠生起、使已经生起的昏沉睡眠进一步增长广大的食物。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, arati tandī vijambhikā bhattasammado cetaso ca līnattaṃ. Tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā thinamiddhassa uppādāya , uppannassa vā thinamiddhassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
不过,在发勤界等这些当中,通过如理作意,它就被断除了。所谓发勤界,就是最初发起的精进。所谓出离界,因为是从懈怠中出离,所以比前者更强。所谓勇猛界,因为一步步向前推进,所以又比前者更强。对于这三种精进,如果反复不断地作如理作意,昏沉睡眠就会被断除。因此世尊说:巴利
Ārambhadhātuādīsu pana yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Ārambhadhātu nāma paṭhamārambhavīriyaṃ. Nikkamadhātu nāma kosajjato nikkhantattā tato balavataraṃ. Parakkamadhātu nāma paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavataraṃ. Imasmiṃ tippabhede vīriye yonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,有发动界、出离界、勇猛界。在那里,反复如理作意,就是不让还没生起的昏沉睡眠生起,也不让已经生起的昏沉睡眠变得更多、更广大的非食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu, nikkamadhātu, parakkamadhātu. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamanāhāro anuppannassa vā thinamiddhassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā thinamiddhassa bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除昏沉睡眠:把握过量饮食之相、变换姿势、作意光明想、住在露天处、亲近善知识、说适当的话。比如有人吃饭时手伸到哪就吃到哪,吃到吐,吃到翻滚,吃到松开腰带,吃到像乌鸦一样黑着脸,吃饱后坐在夜间住处或白天住处修沙门法时,昏沉睡眠就像一头大公象一样压过来。但如果比丘留出四五口的量,然后喝水维持身体,就不会有昏沉睡眠。所以,即使只是把握了过量饮食这个相,昏沉睡眠也会被断除。在哪种姿势里昏沉睡眠袭来,就换成另一种姿势,也会断除;夜里作意月光、灯光、火炬光,白天作意日光,也会断除;住在露天处,也会断除;亲近像大迦叶长老那样已经断除昏沉睡眠的善知识,也会断除;在站立、坐下等时候,依靠头陀支说适当的话,也会断除。因此说“有六种法能帮助断除昏沉睡眠”。他还清楚地知道:由这六种法断除了昏沉睡眠之后,将来以阿罗汉道使它不再生起。巴利
Apica cha dhammā thinamiddhassa pahānāya saṃvattanti – atibhojane nimittaggāho, iriyāpathasamparivattanatā, ālokasaññāmanasikāro, abbhokāsavāso, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Āharahatthaka bhuttavamitaka tatravaṭṭaka alaṃsāṭaka kākamāsakabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhāne nisinnassa hi samaṇadhammaṃ karoto thinamiddhaṃ mahāhatthī viya ottharantaṃ āgacchati. Catupañcaālopaokāsaṃ pana ṭhapetvā pānīyaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlassa bhikkhuno taṃ na hotīti atibhojane nimittaṃ gaṇhantassāpi thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Yasmiṃ iriyāpathe thinamiddhaṃ okkamati tato aññaṃ parivattentassāpi, rattiṃ candālokadīpālokaukkāloke divā sūriyālokaṃ manasikarontassāpi, abbhokāse vasantassāpi, mahākassapattherasadise pahīnathinamiddhe kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati; ṭhānanisajjādīsu dhutaṅganissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā thinamiddhassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa thinamiddhassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
心不平静时,由于不如理作意,掉举和恶作就会生起。所谓“不平静”,就是指没有平静下来的状态;从含义上说,这本身就是掉举和恶作。在这里,如果一个人频繁地让不如理作意运转,掉举和恶作就会生起。因此,世尊说:巴利
Cetaso avūpasame ayonisomanasikārena uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādo hoti. Avūpasamo nāma avūpasantākāro; uddhaccakukkuccamevetaṃ atthato. Tattha ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato uddhaccakukkuccaṃ uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,存在心的不寂静。在那里,频繁地不如理作意——这就是让尚未生起的掉举和恶作得以生起、让已经生起的掉举和恶作进一步增长和扩大的食物。巴利
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, cetaso avūpasamo. Tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
然而,在称为定的心寂静中,依靠如理作意,他的(掉举与恶作)就被断除。因此,世尊说:巴利
Samādhisaṅkhāte pana cetaso vūpasame yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,存在一种心的寂止。在那里,反复进行如理作意——这是为了让尚未生起的掉举和恶作不生起,也是为了让已经生起的掉举和恶作不进一步增长、不扩大。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, cetaso vūpasamo. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamanāhāro anuppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除掉举和恶作:多闻、好问、在律方面有透彻的了解、亲近年长者、结交善友、说合适的话。因为,即使一个人只是按照巴利文和义理,学习一部、两部、三部、四部或五部尼柯耶,他的掉举和恶作也会被断除。对于经常询问什么是允许、什么是不允许的人,对于因为长期修习而通晓律制规定的人,对于去拜访年长的大长老的人,对于亲近像优波离长老那样持律的善友的人,掉举和恶作也会被断除;在站立、坐下等威仪中,谈论与允许和不允许相关且合适的话题,也能断除掉举和恶作。因此说“有六种法能帮助断除掉举和恶作”。然而,当这六种法已经断除了掉举和恶作之后,他了知:掉举在未来以阿罗汉道不再生起,恶作在未来以不还道不再生起。巴利
Apica cha dhammā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattanti – bahussutatā, paripucchakatā, vinaye pakataññutā, vuḍḍhasevitā , kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Bāhusaccenapi hi ekaṃ vā dve vā tayo vā cattāro vā pañca vā nikāye pāḷivasena ca atthavasena ca uggaṇhantassāpi uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati. Kappiyākappiyaparipucchābahulassāpi, vinayapaññattiyaṃ ciṇṇavasībhāvatāya pakataññunopi, vuḍḍhe mahallakatthere upasaṅkamantassāpi, upālittherasadise vinayadhare kalyāṇamitte sevantassapi uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati; ṭhānanisajjādīsu kappiyākappiyanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīne uddhaccakukkucce uddhaccassa arahattamaggena kukkuccassa anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
在能引生疑的诸法上,由于不如理作意,疑就生起。所谓能引生疑的诸法,其实就是疑本身,因为它们一再成为疑的原因。在那里,如果不断让不如理作意活跃起来,疑就会生起。因此世尊说:巴利
Vicikicchāṭhānīyesu dhammesu ayonisomanasikārena vicikicchāya uppādo hoti. Vicikicchāṭhānīyā dhammā nāma punappunaṃ vicikicchāya kāraṇattā vicikicchāva. Tattha ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato vicikicchā uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,有能引发疑的诸法。在那里,不如理作意的反复修习——这就是尚未生起的疑得以生起的食,也是已经生起的疑进一步增长、扩大的食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, vicikicchāṭhānīyā dhammā. Tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannāya vā vicikicchāya uppādāya, uppannāya vā vicikicchāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
对于善等诸法,以如理作意,他的舍断便生起。因此世尊说:巴利
Kusalādidhammesu yonisomanasikārena panassā pahānaṃ hoti. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,有善与不善的法,有有罪与无罪的法,有低劣与殊胜的法,有黑暗与光明相对的法。在那里,反复如理作意——这就是使尚未生起的疑不生起、使已生起的疑不增长广大的非食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā, sāvajjānavajjā dhammā, hīnappaṇītā dhammā, kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamanāhāro anuppannāya vā vicikicchāya uppādāya, uppannāya vā vicikicchāya bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除疑:多闻、好问、在律中熟悉、胜解多、亲近善友、说合适的话。因为即使一个人通过多闻,按巴利原文和义理学习一部……乃至五部尼柯耶,他的疑也会被断除。对于多问三宝的人,对于在律中熟练自在的人,对于在三宝中具有被称为安立之信的胜解多的人,对于亲近像婆迦梨长老那样信解坚定的善友的人,疑也会被断除。在站立、坐下等时候,依三宝功德说合适的话,也能断除疑。因此说“有六种法能帮助断除疑”。然而,他以这六种法断除疑之后,了知:疑以入流道在未来不再生起。巴利
Apica cha dhammā vicikicchāya pahānāya saṃvattanti – bahussutatā, paripucchakatā, vinaye pakataññutā, adhimokkhabahulatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Bāhusaccenapi hi ekaṃ vā…pe… pañca vā nikāye pāḷivasena ca atthavasena ca uggaṇhantassāpi vicikicchā pahīyati. Tīṇi ratanāni ārabbha paripucchābahulassāpi, vinaye ciṇṇavasībhāvassāpi, tīsu ratanesu okappaniyasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhabahulassāpi , saddhādhimutte vakkalittherasadise kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi vicikicchā pahīyati. Ṭhānanissajjādīsu tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ guṇanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā vicikicchāya pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnāya vicikicchāya sotāpattimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
觉支分解说巴利
Bojjhaṅgapabbavaṇṇanā
在觉支分里,“有”是指通过获得而存在,“无”是指由于没有获得而不存在。至于“未生的”等等说法,就先拿念觉支来说——巴利
Bojjhaṅgapabbe santanti paṭilābhavasena vijjamānaṃ. Asantanti appaṭilābhavasena avijjamānaṃ. Yathā ca anuppannassātiādīsu pana satisambojjhaṅgassa tāva –
比丘们,存在一些能作为念觉支依托的法。在那里,反复进行如理作意——这就是尚未生起的念觉支得以生起、已经生起的念觉支得以增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食粮。(《相应部》5.183)——生起就是这样发生的。在那里,念本身就是能作为念觉支依托的法。如理作意,就是前面所说的那种特征。如果在那上面频繁地运作,念觉支就会生起。巴利
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā satisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.183) – evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha satiyeva satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Yonisomanasikāro vuttalakkhaṇoyeva. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato satisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati.
另外,有四种法能帮助念觉支生起:念与正知、避开失念的人、亲近具念的人、心倾向于念觉支。
也就是说,在前进等七种情况下,靠念与正知;避开像丢下食物就飞的乌鸦那样失念的人;亲近像帝沙达多长老、无畏长老那样具念的人;在站立、坐下等时候,为了让念现前,心持续倾向、朝向、投入——念觉支就这样生起。
而这样以四种原因生起的念觉支,他通过阿罗汉道了知:它的修习已经圆满。巴利
Apica cattāro dhammā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – satisampajaññaṃ, muṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanatā, upaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Abhikkantādīsu hi sattasu ṭhānesu satisampajaññena, bhattanikkhittakākasadise muṭṭhassatipuggale parivajjanena, tissadattattheraabhayattherasadise upaṭṭhitassatipuggale sevanena, ṭhānanisajjādīsu satisamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatāya ca satisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. Evaṃ catūhi kāraṇehi uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
至于择法觉支,则是这样:巴利
Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pana –
比丘们,有善与不善的诸法……乃至……有黑白相对的诸法。在那里,反复如理作意——这就是能使尚未生起的择法觉支得以生起的食,也是能使已经生起的择法觉支得以增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā…pe… kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
这样就生起了。巴利
Evaṃ uppādo hoti.
另外,有七种法有助于生起择法觉支:多问、把事物弄干净、让诸根保持平衡、避开没有智慧的人、亲近有智慧的人、反复观察深奥智慧的所行境界、以及心倾向于它。其中,多问是指对蕴、界、处、根、力、觉支、道支、禅那、止、观这些法的意义,反复地依义请问。把事物弄干净,是指让内在和外在的事物都变得清净。当一个人的头发、指甲、体毛变长,或者身体里体液过盛、被汗垢沾染时,内在的事物就不清净、不干净。而当衣服破旧、污秽、发臭,或者住处肮脏时,外在的事物就不清净、不干净。所以,要通过剪头发等、通过上泻下泻等让身体变得轻快,以及通过涂油、沐浴等,把内在的事物弄清净;要通过缝补、洗涤、染色、打扫住处等,把外在的事物弄清净。因为当这内在和外在的事物不清净时,生起的心与心所中的智也不清净、不纯净,就像依靠不干净的灯盏、灯芯、灯油而生起的灯光一样。而当内在和外在的事物清净时,生起的心与心所中的智也清净,就像依靠干净的灯盏、灯芯、灯油而生起的灯光一样。因此说:“把事物弄干净有助于生起择法觉支。”巴利
Apica satta dhammā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – paripucchakatā, vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā, duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā, paññavantapuggalasevanā, gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā, tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha paripucchakatāti khandhadhātuāyatanaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgajhānasamathavipassanānaṃ atthasannissitaparipucchābahulatā. Vatthuvisadakiriyāti ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yadā hissa kesanakhalomāni dīghāni honti, sarīraṃ vā ussannadosañceva sedamalamakkhitañca, tadā ajjhattikaṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Yadā pana cīvaraṃ jiṇṇaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ duggandhaṃ hoti, senāsanaṃ vā uklāpaṃ, tadā bāhiraṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Tasmā kesādichedanena uddhaṃvirecanaadhovirecanādīhi sarīrasallahukabhāvakaraṇena, ucchādananhāpanena ca ajjhattikavatthu visadaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sūcikammadhovanarajanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇādīhi bāhiravatthu visadaṃ kātabbaṃ. Etasmiñhi ajjhattikabāhiravatthumhi avisade uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ; aparisuddhāni dīpakapallakavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Visade pana ajjhattikabāhiravatthumhi uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi visadaṃ hoti parisuddhāni dīpakapallakavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vatthuvisadakiriyā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattatī’’ti.
所谓“使诸根平衡”,就是让信等诸根达到均等的状态。因为如果一个人的信根很强,而其他诸根很弱,那么精进根就无法发挥策励的作用,念根无法发挥现前的作用,定根无法发挥不散乱的作用,慧根无法发挥观见的作用。所以,对于因为作意而使某根变得过强的情况,应当通过观察诸法的自性,或者用其他适当的方式,以不作意来使它减弱。这里可以引用瓦迦利长老的故事作为例子。反过来,如果精进根过强,那么信根就无法发挥胜解的作用,其他诸根也无法各自发挥各自的作用。所以,应当通过修习轻安等来使它减弱。这里则可以引用首那长老的故事来说明。同样地,对其余诸根也应如此理解:当其中某一根过强时,其余诸根就无法胜任各自的作用。巴利
Indriyasamattapaṭipādanā nāma saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ samabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Sace hissa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, itarāni mandāni, tato vīriyindriyaṃ paggahakiccaṃ, satindriyaṃ upaṭṭhānakiccaṃ, samādhindriyaṃ avikkhepakiccaṃ, paññindriyaṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Tasmā taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vā yathā vā manasikaroto balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena hāpetabbaṃ. Vakkalittheravatthu cettha nidassanaṃ. Sace pana vīriyindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, atha neva saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, na itarāni itarakiccabhedaṃ. Tasmā taṃ passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabbaṃ. Tatrāpi soṇattheravatthu dassetabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi ekassa balavabhāve sati itaresaṃ attano kiccesu asamatthatā veditabbā.
在这里,特别要赞叹信与慧、定与精进的平衡。因为信强而慧弱的人,就成了盲信者,在不应生信的地方生信。慧强而信弱的人,则走上狡诈之路,就像由药物引发的疾病一样难以治愈;他会过度执取“只要心生起就是善”的见解,不修布施等福德,结果投生地狱。两者平衡时,才会在应当生信的地方生信。定强而精进弱时,因为定属于懈怠的一方,懈怠就会占上风。精进强而定弱时,因为精进属于掉举的一方,掉举就会占上风。然而,定与精进结合,就不会陷入懈怠;精进与定结合,就不会陷入掉举。所以,这两者也要让它平等,只有两者平等时才能达到安止。另外,对于修定的人来说,即使信强一些也是可以的。这样,他带着信心、带着确信,就能证得安止。巴利
Visesato panettha saddhāpaññānaṃ samādhivīriyānañca samataṃ pasaṃsanti. Balavasaddho hi mandapañño muddhappasanno hoti, avatthusmiṃ pasīdati. Balavapañño mandasaddho kerāṭikapakkhaṃ bhajati, bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hoti ‘cittuppādamatteneva kusalaṃ hotī’ti atidhāvitvā dānādīni puññāni akaronto niraye uppajjati. Ubhinnaṃ pana samatāya vatthusmiṃyeva pasīdati. Balavasamādhiṃ pana mandavīriyaṃ, samādhissa kosajjapakkhattā, kosajjaṃ adhibhavati. Balavavīriyaṃ mandasamādhiṃ, vīriyassa uddhaccapakkhattā, uddhaccaṃ adhibhavati. Samādhi pana vīriyena saṃyojito kosajje patituṃ na labhati. Vīriyaṃ samādhinā saṃyojitaṃ uddhacce patituṃ na labhati. Tasmā tadubhayampi samaṃ kātabbaṃ. Ubhayasamatāya hi appanā hoti . Apica samādhikammikassa balavatīpi saddhā vaṭṭati. Evaṃ so saddahanto okappento appanaṃ pāpuṇissati.
对于修定的人来说,一境性要强一些才合适,这样他才能达到安止。对于修观的人来说,慧要强一些才合适,这样他才能通达诸法的特相。不过,当两者均等时,安止也照样能成就。至于念,则在任何情况下都要强一些才合适。因为念能保护心,使它不会因为偏向掉举的信、精进、慧而落入掉举,也不会因为偏向懈怠的定而落入懈怠。所以,念就像盐一样,一切菜肴里都需要它;又像一位什么都管的辅政大臣,国王的一切事务都要靠他,因此在任何地方都应当被需要。因此说:“世尊说,念在一切处都需要。为什么呢?因为心以念为依靠,念的作用是守护;没有念,就无法策励心、抑制心。”巴利
Samādhipaññāsu pana samādhikammikassa ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati. Evañhi so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Vipassanākammikassa paññā balavatī vaṭṭati. Evañhi so lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ubhinnaṃ pana samatāya appanā hotiyeva. Sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭati. Sati hi cittaṃ uddhaccapakkhikānaṃ saddhāvīriyapaññānaṃ vasena uddhaccapātato, kosajjapakkhikena ca samādhinā kosajjapātato rakkhati. Tasmā sā, loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu, sabbakammikaamacco viya ca sabbarājakiccesu, sabbattha icchitabbā. Tenāha ‘‘sati ca pana sabbatthikā vuttā bhagavatā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Cittañhi satipaṭisaraṇaṃ, ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā ca sati; na vinā satiyā cittassa paggahaniggaho hotī’’ti.
远离无慧之人,是指远离那些对蕴等种种法没有深入通达智慧的愚人。亲近有慧之人,是指亲近那些具备把握五十种相、具足生灭智慧的人。观察深智的行境,是指对运行于甚深蕴等法中的甚深智慧,加以分别观察。倾向于彼,是指在站立、坐下等一切姿势中,为了让择法觉支生起,心倾向于彼、偏向于彼、朝向于彼。他这样了知:已经生起的择法觉支,通过阿罗汉道而达到修习圆满。巴利
Duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā nāma khandhādibhede anogāḷhapaññānaṃ dummedhapuggalānaṃ ārakā parivajjanaṃ. Paññavantapuggalasevanā nāma samapaññāsalakkhaṇapariggāhikāya udayabbayapaññāya samannāgatapuggalasevanā. Gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā nāma gambhīresu khandhādīsu pavattāya gambhīrapaññāya pabhedapaccavekkhaṇā. Tadadhimuttatā nāma ṭhānanisajjādīsu dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatā. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
精进觉支的——巴利
Vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa –
比丘们,有发勤界、出离界、勇猛界。在那里,反复多修如理作意,就是让尚未生起的精进觉支得以生起、让已经生起的精进觉支进一步增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
这样就生起了。巴利
Evaṃ uppādo hoti.
另外,有十一种法能帮助生起精进觉支:观察恶趣的可怕、看见精进的功德、观察过去诸佛所走的道路、对乞食心怀恭敬、观察遗产的殊胜、观察导师的殊胜、观察出身的殊胜、观察同梵行者的殊胜、远离懈怠的人、亲近已经发起精进的人,以及内心倾向于这些。巴利
Apica ekādasa dhammā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇatā, ānisaṃsadassāvitā, gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇatā, piṇḍapātāpacāyanatā , dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, satthumahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, sabrahmacārimahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, kusītapuggalaparivajjanatā, āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
在这里,从地狱中遭受五种系缚刑罚开始,即使是在体验极大痛苦的时候;在畜生道,被网、笼、陷阱等捕捉的时候;被刺棒等击打、驱赶着拉车等的时候;在饿鬼界,即使历经数千年乃至一尊佛出世的间隔,因饥渴而备受煎熬的时候;在黑绳阿修罗中,以仅有六十肘或八十肘、只剩皮包骨的身躯,遭受风、热等痛苦的时候——都无法生起精进觉支。
“比丘,现在正是你该精进的时候”,这样观察恶趣怖畏的人,也能生起精进觉支。“懈怠的人不可能获得九种出世间法;只有发起精进的人才能获得,这就是精进的功德”,这样看见功德的人也能生起。“必须走一切佛、独觉佛、大弟子们走过的路,而懈怠的人走不了这条路”,这样观察所行之道的人也能生起。“那些用饮食等供养你的人,既不是你的亲属,也不是你的奴仆佣人,更不是因为依赖你想着‘我们要靠你活命’才布施殊胜的饮食等;他们是为了期望自己所做的善行能得大果报才布施的。导师也不是因为看到‘这个人受用这些资具后,会身体强壮、安乐而住’才允许你接受资具;而是因为看到‘这个人受用这些后,会修习沙门法,从轮回之苦中解脱’,才允许你受用这些资具。如今你懈怠而住,就不能恭敬那一钵之食。只有发起精进的人,才称得上恭敬钵食。”这样观察恭敬钵食的人也能生起,就像大友长老那样。巴利
Tattha nirayesu pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇato paṭṭhāya mahādukkhaṃ anubhavanakālepi, tiracchānayoniyaṃ jālakkhipakumīnādīhi gahitakālepi, pācanakaṇṭakādippahārāvitunnassa pana sakaṭavahanādikālepi, pettivisaye anekānipi vassasahassāni ekaṃ buddhantarampi khuppipāsāhi āturībhūtakālepi, kālakañjikaasuresu saṭṭhihatthaasītihatthappamāṇena aṭṭhicammamatteneva attabhāvena vātātapādidukkhānubhavanakālepi na sakkā vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṃ uppādetuṃ. ‘Ayameva te, bhikkhu, kālo vīriyakaraṇāyā’ti evaṃ apāyabhayaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi vīriyasambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. ‘Na sakkā kusītena nava lokuttaradhammā laddhuṃ; āraddhavīriyeneva sakkā; ayamānisaṃso vīriyassā’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsadassāvinopi uppajjati. ‘Sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhamahāsāvakeheva te gatamaggo gantabbo; so ca na sakkā kusītena gantu’nti evaṃ gamanavīthiṃ paccavekkhantassāpi uppajjati. ‘Ye taṃ piṇḍapātādīhi upaṭṭhahanti, ime te manussā neva ñātakā, na dāsakammakarā, nāpi taṃ nissāya ‘jīvissāmā’ti te paṇītāni piṇḍapātādīni denti; atha kho attano kārānaṃ mahapphalataṃ paccāsiṃsamānā denti. Satthārāpi ‘ayaṃ ime paccaye paribhuñjitvā kāyadaḷhībahulo sukhaṃ viharissatī’ti na evañca sampassatā tuyhaṃ paccayā anuññatā; atha kho ‘ayaṃ ime paribhuñjamāno samaṇadhammaṃ katvā vaṭṭadukkhato muccissatī’ti te paccayā anuññātā. So dāni tvaṃ kusīto viharanto na taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ apacāyissasi. Āraddhavīriyasseva hi piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ nāma hotī’ti evaṃ piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi uppajjati, mahāmittattherassa viya.
据说,这位长老住在农夫窟。在他托钵的村子里,有一位大近事女把他当作儿子一样照顾。有一天,她要去森林时,对女儿说:女儿啊,某个地方有陈米,某个地方有牛奶,某个地方有酥油,某个地方有糖浆。你兄弟圣友尊者回来的时候,把饭煮好,连同牛奶、酥油、糖浆一起给他,你自己也吃吧。母亲,那您吃什么呢?我昨天用酸粥吃了隔夜饭。母亲,那您白天吃什么呢?女儿,把菜叶放进去,用碎米煮成酸粥放着吧。巴利
Thero kira kassakaleṇe nāma paṭivasati. Tassa ca gocaragāme ekā mahāupāsikā theraṃ puttaṃ katvā paṭijaggati. Sā ekadivasaṃ araññaṃ gacchantī dhītaraṃ āha – ‘‘amma, asukasmiṃ ṭhāne purāṇataṇḍulā, asukasmiṃ khīraṃ, asukasmiṃ sappi, asukasmiṃ phāṇitaṃ. Tava bhātikassa ayyamittassa āgatakāle bhattaṃ pacitvā khīrasappiphāṇitehi saddhiṃ dehi , tvañca bhuñjeyyāsī’’ti. ‘‘Tvaṃ pana kiṃ bhuñjissasi, ammā’’ti? ‘‘Ahaṃ pana hiyyo pakkaṃ pārivāsikabhattaṃ kañjiyena bhuttamhī’’ti. ‘‘Divā kiṃ bhuñjissasi, ammā’’ti? ‘‘Sākapaṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā kaṇataṇḍulehi ambilayāguṃ pacitvā ṭhapehi, ammā’’ti.
长老披上袈裟,正要取出钵时,听到那声音,就对自己教诫说:“听说这位大近事女用稀粥吃了隔夜饭,白天还要吃碎米菜叶酸粥;她却为了你,说有陈米等物。她并不指望靠这些得到田地、宅地、饭食、衣服;她是想求得三种成就才布施的。你能给她那三种成就吗?还是不能?而这钵食,你若带着贪、带着嗔、带着痴,是没法吃的。”于是他把钵放进钵袋,解开系带,转身回到农夫窟,把钵放在床下,袈裟挂在衣竿上,下定决心:“不证到阿罗汉果,我就不起来。”然后精进地坐下。这位长久以来不放逸的比丘,修增观智,在午前就证得了阿罗汉果,像盛开的莲花一样,成为大漏尽者,含笑而坐。住在洞门口树上的天神——巴利
Thero cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattaṃ nīharantova taṃ saddaṃ sutvā attānaṃ ovadi – ‘mahāupāsikā kira kañjiyena pārivāsikabhattaṃ bhuñji; divāpi kaṇapaṇṇambilayāguṃ bhuñjissati; tuyhaṃ atthāya pana purāṇataṇḍulādīni ācikkhati. Taṃ nissāya kho panesā neva khettaṃ, na vatthuṃ, na bhattaṃ, na vatthaṃ paccāsīsati; tisso pana sampattiyo patthayamānā deti. Tvaṃ etissā tā sampattiyo dātuṃ sakkhissasi, na sakkhissasīti? Ayaṃ kho pana piṇḍapāto tayā sarāgena sadosena samohena na sakkā bhuñjitu’nti pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvā gaṇṭhikaṃ muñcitvā nivattitvā kassakaleṇameva gantvā pattaṃ heṭṭhāmañce cīvaraṃ cīvaravaṃse ṭhapetvā ‘arahattaṃ apāpuṇitvā na nikkhamissāmī’ti vīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā nisīdi. Dīgharattaṃ appamatto hutvā nivutthabhikkhu vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā purebhattameva arahattaṃ patvā vikasamānamiva padumaṃ mahākhīṇāsavo sitaṃ karontova nisīdi. Leṇadvāre rukkhamhi adhivatthā devatā –
礼敬你,人中良骏!礼敬你,人中最胜者!
你的诸漏已尽,你是值得受人供养的人,朋友。巴利
‘‘Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama; Yassa te āsavā khīṇā, dakkhiṇeyyosi mārisā’’ti.
说完优陀那之后,她说道:“尊者,像您这样已经证得阿罗汉的比丘们,进村托钵时,如果有人供养了食物,那些老妇人就能从苦中解脱了。”巴利
Udānaṃ udānetvā – ‘bhante, piṇḍāya paviṭṭhānaṃ tumhādisānaṃ arahantānaṃ bhikkhaṃ datvā mahallakitthiyo dukkhā muccissantī’ti āha.
长老起身开门,看了看时间,知道“天还早”,就拿着衣钵进了村。那个女孩也把饭准备好了,打开门一边张望一边坐着等:“我哥哥现在该来了,我哥哥现在该来了。”长老来到她家门口时,她接过钵,盛满拌了酥油和糖浆的牛乳饭,放到他手里。长老说了句“愿你安乐”随喜之后,就离开了。她也一直站在那里望着他。巴利
Thero uṭṭhahitvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā kālaṃ olokento ‘pātoyevā’ti ñatvā pattacīvaramādāya gāmaṃ pāvisi. Dārikāpi bhattaṃ sampādetvā ‘idāni me bhātā āgamissati, idāni me bhātā āgamissatīti dvāraṃ vivaritvā olokayamānā nisīdi. Sā, there gharadvāraṃ sampatte, pattaṃ gahetvā sappiphāṇitayojitassa khīrapiṇḍapātassa pūretvā hatthe ṭhapesi. Thero ‘sukhaṃ hotū’ti anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sāpi taṃ olokayamānā aṭṭhāsi.
那时,长老的肤色确实极其清净,诸根明净,面容就像脱离了束缚的熟多罗果一样,极其光艳。大近事女从阿兰若回来,问道:“女儿,你兄长来了吗?”少女就把整件事的经过都告诉了她。近事女知道“今天,我儿子的出家之事已经圆满了”,便说:“女儿,你兄长在佛陀的教法中得到安乐,不会厌倦。”巴利
Therassa hi tadā ativiya parisuddho chavivaṇṇo ahosi, vippasannāni indriyāni, mukhaṃ bandhanā muttatālapakkaṃ viya ativiya virocittha. Mahāupāsikā araññā āgantvā – ‘‘kiṃ, amma, bhātiko te āgato’’ti pucchi. Sā sabbaṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Upāsikā ‘ajja me puttassa pabbajitakiccaṃ matthakaṃ patta’nti ñatvā ‘‘abhiramati te, amma, bhātā buddhasāsane, na ukkaṇṭhatī’’ti āha.
导师留下的这份遗产确实很大,也就是所谓的七种圣财。懈怠的人没办法得到它。就像行为不端的儿子,父母会说“这不是我们的儿子”,把他赶出家门;父母去世后,他得不到遗产。同样,懈怠的人也得不到这份圣财遗产,只有真正发起精进的人才能得到。这样观察遗产的伟大,也能让人生起精进。
“你的导师确实伟大。你的导师在入胎、出家、成正觉、转法轮、示现双神变、从天降下、舍寿行、般涅槃的时候,一万个世界都震动了。你在这样一位伟大导师的教法里出家,却懈怠而住,这合适吗?”这样观察导师的伟大,也能让人生起精进。巴利
Mahantaṃ kho panetaṃ satthu dāyajjaṃ yadidaṃ satta ariyadhanāni nāma. Taṃ na sakkā kusītena gahetuṃ. Yathā hi vippaṭipannaṃ puttaṃ mātāpitaro ‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ aputto’ti paribāhiraṃ karonti; so tesaṃ accayena dāyajjaṃ na labhati; evaṃ kusītopi idaṃ ariyadhanadāyajjaṃ na labhati, āraddhavīriyova labhatīti dāyajjamahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati. ‘Mahā kho pana te satthā. Satthuno hi te mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhigaṇhanakālepi abhinikkhamanepi abhisambodhiyampi dhammacakkapavattanayamakapāṭihāriyadevorohanaāyusaṅkhāravossajjanesupi parinibbānakālepi dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha. Yuttaṃ nu te evarūpassa satthuno sāsane pabbajitvā kusītena bhavitu’nti evaṃ satthumahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati.
“从出身来看,你现在并不是出身低贱的人。你出生在血统未曾中断的大选出王统传承下来的甘蔗王族中,是净饭大王和摩耶王妃的孙子,是罗睺罗贤者的弟弟。像你这样身为胜者之子,却懈怠度日,实在不合适。”这样观察出身的尊贵时,精进也会生起。“舍利弗、目犍连以及八十位大弟子,都是靠精进证悟了出世间法。你是要走上这些同梵行者的道路,还是不走?”这样观察同梵行者的伟大时,精进也会生起。巴利
‘Jātiyāpi tvaṃ idāni na lāmakajātikosi; asambhinnāya mahāsammatapaveṇiyā āgate okkākarājavaṃse jāto; sirisuddhodanamahārājassa ca mahāmāyādeviyā ca nattā; rāhulabhaddassa kaniṭṭho. Tayā nāma evarūpena jinaputtena hutvā na yuttaṃ kusītena viharitu’nti evaṃ jātimahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati. ‘Sāriputtamoggallānā ceva asītimahāsāvakā ca vīriyeneva lokuttaradhammaṃ paṭivijjhiṃsu. Tvaṃ etesaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ maggaṃ paṭipajjasi, nappaṭipajjasī’ti evaṃ sabrahmacārimahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati.
他避开那些像吃饱后盘卧着的大蟒蛇一样、身心精力都已松弛的懈怠之人;也亲近那些已经发起精进、心志坚定的人;他的心在行、住、坐、卧等处,为了生起精进而倾注、朝向、倾向于——这时,精进就会生起。他清楚地知道:这样生起的精进,通过阿罗汉道达到修习的圆满。巴利
Kucchiṃ pūretvā ṭhitaajagarasadise vissaṭṭhakāyikacetasikavīriye kusītapuggale parivajjentassāpi āraddhavīriye pahitatte puggale sevantassāpi ṭhānanisajjādīsu viriyuppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
关于喜觉支——巴利
Pītisambojjhaṅgassa –
比丘们,有些法能成为喜觉支的基础。在那里,反复如理作意,就是尚未生起的喜觉支得以生起的食,也是已经生起的喜觉支得以增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。巴利
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
喜觉支就是这样生起的。在这里,喜本身就是能作为喜觉支生起处所的法。让喜生起的那种作意,就叫如理作意。巴利
Evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha pītiyeva pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma. Tassā uppādakamanasikāro yonisomanasikāro nāma.
另外,有十一种法能帮助喜觉支生起:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念、寂止随念,避开粗鄙的人,亲近温和的人,省察能让人生起净信的经典,以及心倾向于这些。巴利
Apica ekādasa dhammā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – buddhānussati, dhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatānussati, upasamānussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā, siniddhapuggalasevanatā, pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
忆念佛功德的人,喜觉支会生起,一直遍满全身,达到近行定;忆念法功德、僧功德的人也是这样;省察长久以来守护而毫无毁犯的四遍净戒的人也是这样;在家人省察十戒、五戒的人也是这样;在饥荒等怖畏时,把殊胜的食物布施给同梵行者,然后省察布施说“我们这样布施了”的人也是这样;在家人也在这样的时刻,省察对持戒者的布施的人也是这样;省察那些具足种种功德而成为天人的天神,其功德也存在于自己身上的人也是这样;省察被等至镇伏的烦恼在六十年、七十年里都不会现起的人也是这样;在瞻仰佛塔、菩提树、长老时,因为不恭敬的行为而表现出粗鄙,对佛等没有净信与柔和之心,像驴背上的尘土一样的粗鄙之人,避开他们的人也是这样;亲近对佛等充满净信、心地柔软的温和之人的人也是这样;省察阐明三宝功德、能生净信的经典的人也是这样;在站立、坐下等威仪中,为了让喜生起而心倾向于、斜向于、朝向于喜的人也是这样。他清楚地知道:这样生起的喜觉支,通过阿拉汉道达到修习的圆满。巴利
Buddhaguṇe anussarantassāpi hi yāva upacārā sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno pītisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati; dhammasaṅghaguṇe anussarantassāpi, dīgharattaṃ akkhaṇḍaṃ katvā rakkhitaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, gihino dasasīlaṃ pañcasīlaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, dubbhikkhabhayādīsu paṇītaṃ bhojanaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ datvā ‘evaṃ nāma adamhā’ti cāgaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, gihinopi evarūpe kāle sīlavantānaṃ dinnadānaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, yehi guṇehi samannāgatā devatā devattaṃ pattā tathārūpānaṃ guṇānaṃ attani atthitaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, samāpattiyā vikkhambhite kilese saṭṭhipi sattatipi vassāni na samudācarantīti paccavekkhantassāpi, cetiyadassanabodhidassanatheradassanesu asakkaccakiriyāya saṃsūcitalūkhabhāve buddhādīsu pasādasinehābhāvena gadrabhapiṭṭhe rajasadise lūkhapuggale parivajjentassāpi, buddhādīsu pasādabahule muducitte siniddhapuggale sevantassāpi, ratanattayaguṇaparidīpake pasādanīyasuttante paccavekkhantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu pītiuppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
轻安觉支——巴利
Passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa –
比丘们,有身轻安和心轻安。在这里,反复如理作意——这就是让尚未生起的轻安觉支得以生起的食,也是让已经生起的轻安觉支进一步增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。巴利
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, kāyapassaddhi cittapassaddhi. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
轻安觉支就是这样生起的。此外,有七种法能促成轻安觉支的生起:受用精细的饮食、受用舒适的气候、受用舒适的威仪姿势、运用中舍的加行、避开身体躁动的人、亲近身体轻安的人、内心倾向于它。
因为,当人受用精细、柔滑、适合的饮食时,当人在寒冷炎热等气候中,在站立等威仪姿势中,受用适合的气候和威仪时,轻安就会生起。不过,如果一个人具有大丈夫的种性,对一切气候和威仪都能安忍无碍,这段话就不是针对他说的。对于有适应与不适应之分的人,避开不适应的气候和威仪,受用适应的,轻安也会生起。
所谓中舍的加行,就是反复观察自己和他人都是业的所有者;通过这种中舍的加行,轻安就会生起。有些人拿着土块、棍棒等到处伤害别人,避开这种身体躁动的人,亲近那些手脚调伏、身体轻安的人,在站立、坐下等时候,为了让轻安生起,内心倾向、偏向、朝向于它,轻安也会生起。
对于这样生起的轻安,他了知:它通过阿罗汉道而达到修习的圆满。巴利
Evaṃ uppādo hoti. Apica satta dhammā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – paṇītabhojanasevanatā, utusukhasevanatā , iriyāpathasukhasevanatā, majjhattapayogatā, sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā, passaddhikāyapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Paṇītañhi siniddhaṃ sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjantassāpi, sītuṇhesu utūsu ṭhānādīsu ca iriyāpathesu sappāyaṃ utuñca iriyāpathañca sevantassāpi passaddhi uppajjati. Yo pana mahāpurisajātiko sabbautuiriyāpathakkhamova hoti, na taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yassa sabhāgavisabhāgatā atthi, tasseva visabhāge utuiriyāpathe vajjetvā sabhāge sevantassāpi uppajjati. Majjhattapayogo vuccati attano ca parassa ca kammassakatapaccavekkhaṇā; iminā majjhattapayogena uppajjati. Yo leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi paraṃ viheṭhayamānova vicarati, evarūpaṃ sāraddhakāyaṃ puggalaṃ parivajjentassāpi, saṃyatapādapāṇiṃ passaddhakāyaṃ puggalaṃ sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu passaddhiuppādanatthāya ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
定觉支的——巴利
Samādhisambojjhaṅgassa –
比丘们,存在止的相,存在不散乱的相。在那里,反复如理作意——这就是尚未生起的定觉支得以生起的食,也是已经生起的定觉支得以增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, samathanimittaṃ abyagganimittaṃ. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
它就是这样生起的。在这里,止本身就是止的相,从不散乱的含义来说,也是不散乱的相。巴利
Evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha samathova samathanimittaṃ, avikkhepaṭṭhena ca abyagganimittanti.
另外,有十一种法能帮助定觉支生起:让依处清净、让诸根平衡、善巧于相、在适当的时候策励心、在适当的时候抑制心、在适当的时候让心喜悦、在适当的时候对心保持旁观、远离未得定的人、亲近已得定的人、审察禅那与解脱、以及心倾向于这些。其中,让依处清净和让诸根平衡,应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
Apica ekādasa dhammā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – vatthuvisadakiriyatā , indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā, nimittakusalatā, samaye cittassa paggaṇhanatā, samaye cittassa niggahaṇanatā, samaye sampahaṃsanatā, samaye ajjhupekkhaṇatā, asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā, samāhitapuggalasevanatā, jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha vatthuvisadakiriyatā ca indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā ca vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
所谓“相善巧”,就是对遍相取相的善巧。所谓“在适当的时候策励心”,是指当心因为精进过于松懈等而变得低沉时,就在那个时候,通过发起择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支来策励它。所谓“在适当的时候抑制心”,是指当心因为精进过于猛烈等而变得掉举时,就在那个时候,通过发起轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支来抑制它。所谓“在适当的时候令心喜悦”,是指当心因为智慧运作迟钝,或者没有证得寂止之乐而变得没有滋味时,就在那个时候,通过观察八种悚惧事来令它悚惧。八种悚惧事就是:生、老、病、死这四种,恶趣之苦是第五种,过去以轮回为根源的苦,未来以轮回为根源的苦,现在以觅食为根源的苦。并且通过随念三宝的功德来生起净信。这就叫作“在适当的时候令心喜悦”。巴利
Nimittakusalatā nāma kasiṇanimittassa uggahaṇakusalatā. Samaye cittassa paggahaṇanatāti yasmiṃ samaye atisithilavīriyatādīhi līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanena tassa paggaṇhanaṃ. Samaye cittassa niggahaṇanatāti yasmiṃ samaye accāraddhavīriyatādīhi uddhaṭaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanena tassa niggaṇhanaṃ. Samaye sampahaṃsanatāti yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paññāpayogamandatāya vā upasamasukhānadhigamena vā nirassādaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye aṭṭhasaṃvegavatthupaccavekkhaṇena saṃvejeti. Aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūni nāma jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni cattāri, apāyadukkhaṃ pañcamaṃ, atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ dukkhanti. Ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena ca pasādaṃ janeti. Ayaṃ vuccati samaye sampahaṃsanatāti.
所谓“适时中舍”,是指在某个时候,心依正行道而变得不低沉、不掉举、不厌倦,于所缘平等运转,进入奢摩他道;那时,它在策励、抑制、喜悦这些事上不再起作用,就像车夫对于平稳行走的马一样。这称为适时中舍。所谓“远离不得定的人”,就是远离那些没有得到近行定或安止定、心散乱的人。所谓“亲近得定的人”,就是亲近、交往、承事那些以近行定或安止定而心得定的人。所谓“一向倾向于彼”,就是在站立、坐下等一切威仪中,心只倾向于、斜向于、朝向于让定生起。这样修行的人,这定就会生起。生起之后,他了知:以阿拉汉道使其修习圆满。巴利
Samaye ajjhupekkhanatā nāma yasmiṃ samaye sammāpaṭipattiṃ āgamma alīnaṃ anuddhaṭaṃ anirassādaṃ ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ samathavīthipaṭipannaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadāyaṃ paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu na byāpāraṃ āpajjati sārathī viya samappavattesu assesu. Ayaṃ vuccati samaye ajjhupekkhanatāti. Asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā nāma upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā appattānaṃ vikkhittacittānaṃ puggalānaṃ ārakā parivajjanaṃ. Samāhitapuggalasevanatā nāma upacārena vā appanāya vā samāhitacittānaṃ sevanā bhajanā payirupāsanā. Tadadhimuttatā nāma ṭhānanisajjādīsu samādhiuppādanatthaṃyeva ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatā. Evañhi paṭipajjato esa uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
关于舍觉支——巴利
Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa –
比丘们,存在一些能作为舍觉支生起基础的法。在那里,反复如理作意,就是它的食,能促使尚未生起的舍觉支生起,也能让已经生起的舍觉支进一步增长、扩展、修习、圆满。巴利
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
舍觉支就是这样生起的。在这里,只有舍本身才算是能作为舍觉支生起基础的法。此外,还有五种法能帮助舍觉支生起:对有情保持中舍、对诸行保持中舍、远离贪爱有情与诸行的人、亲近对有情与诸行保持中舍的人、内心倾向于这种中舍。巴利
Evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha upekkhāva upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma. Apica pañca dhammā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – sattamajjhattatā, saṅkhāramajjhattatā, sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
在这里,通过两种方式让对众生的平等心生起:你凭自己的业而来,也将凭自己的业而去;他也是凭自己的业而来,也将凭自己的业而去。你在贪恋谁呢?——这是通过观察业为自属来修。以及:从究竟意义上说,根本没有众生。你在贪恋谁呢?——这是通过观察无自性来修。通过两种方式让对诸行的平等心生起:这件袈裟会逐渐变色、变旧,变成擦脚布后,会被扔在棍子顶端。如果它有主人,就不会让它这样毁坏。——这是通过观察无主来修。以及:这是不持久的,只是暂时的。——这是通过观察暂时性来修。对袈裟如此,对钵等也应同样套用。巴利
Tattha dvīhākārehi sattamajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpeti – ‘tvaṃ attano kammena āgantvā attanova kammena gamissasi. Esopi attano kammena āgantvā attanova kammena gamissati. Tvaṃ kaṃ kelāyasī’ti evaṃ kammassakatapaccavekkhaṇena ca ‘paramatthato sattoyeva natthi. So tvaṃ kaṃ kelāyasī’ti evaṃ nissattapaccavekkhaṇena ca. Dvīhevākārehi saṅkhāramajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpeti – ‘idaṃ cīvaraṃ anupubbena vaṇṇavikārañceva jiṇṇabhāvañca upagantvā pādapuñchanacoḷakaṃ hutvā yaṭṭhikoṭiyā chaḍḍanīyaṃ bhavissati. Sace panassa sāmiko bhaveyya, nāssa evaṃ vinassituṃ dadeyyā’ti evaṃ assāmikabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena ca. ‘Anaddhaniyaṃ idaṃ tāvakālika’nti evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena ca. Yathā ca cīvare, evaṃ pattādīsupi yojanā kātabbā.
远离爱着有情与行之人:这里,如果一个人——无论是在家人还是出家人——贪爱自己的儿女等,或者出家人贪爱自己的弟子、同住者、依止师等,亲手为他们剃发、缝衣、洗衣、染色、烤钵等,片刻不见就四处张望:“某某沙弥在哪里?某某小比丘在哪里?”像迷路的鹿一样东看西看;别人为了剃发等事来请求:“请暂时派某某来一下”,他也不放人,说:“我们自己都不让他做自己的事,你们把他带去会让他劳累的。”——这样的人就叫爱着有情者。巴利
Sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatāti ettha yo puggalo gihī vā attano puttadhītādike, pabbajito vā attano antevāsikasamānupajjhāyakādike mamāyati, sahattheneva nesaṃ kesacchedanasūcikammacīvaradhovanarajanapattapacanādīni karoti, muhuttampi apassanto ‘asuko sāmaṇero kuhiṃ? Asuko daharo kuhi’nti? Bhantamigo viya ito cito ca āloketi; aññena kesacchedanādīnaṃ atthāya ‘muhuttaṃ tāva asukaṃ pesethā’ti yāciyamānopi ‘amhepi taṃ attano kammaṃ na kārema, tumhe naṃ gahetvā kilamessathā’ti na deti – ayaṃ sattakelāyano nāma.
如果有人对衣、钵、床、座、小刀、杖等东西特别贪爱执著,连别人用手碰一下都不肯,就算有人只是暂时借用,他也会说:“我们自己对这些东西都爱惜得舍不得用,凭什么给你们?”——这种人就叫“执著于行的人”。如果有人对这两类东西都保持中立、无所谓——这种人就叫“对有情和行保持中立的人”。这样一来,这个舍觉支,既会在远离那种执著于有情和行的人那里生起,也会在亲近对有情和行保持中立的人那里生起,也会在为了让它生起而在站立、坐下等姿势中心倾向于、斜向于、朝向它的那种心那里生起。这样生起之后,他就知道:通过阿罗汉道,它的修习就圆满了。其余各处,意思都很清楚。巴利
Yo pana cīvarapattathālakakattarayaṭṭhiādīni mamāyati, aññassa hatthena parāmasitumpi na deti, tāvakālikaṃ yācitopi ‘mayampi imaṃ mamāyantā na paribhuñjāma, tumhākaṃ kiṃ dassāmā’ti vadati – ayaṃ saṅkhārakelāyano nāma. Yo pana tesu dvīsupi vatthūsu majjhatto udāsīno – ayaṃ sattasaṅkhāramajjhatto nāma. Iti ayaṃ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo evarūpe sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggale ārakā parivajjentassāpi, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggale sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu taduppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
在这两种法门里,讲的都只是纯粹的观。这样,这四种念处在修行前期阶段,是在不同的心里出现的。因为人是用一个心去把握身,用另一个心去把握受,用另一个心去把握心,用另一个心去把握法;但在出世间道的那个刹那,它们只在一个心里出现。从一开始,通过把握身而生起的、与观相应的念,就叫身随观。具备这种念的人,就叫身随观者。当人努力修观、证得圣道时,在道的刹那,与道相应的念,就叫身随观。具备这种念的人,就叫身随观者。通过把握受……通过把握心……通过把握法而生的、与观相应的念,就叫法随观。具备这种念的人,就叫法随观者。当人努力修观、证得圣道时,在道的刹那,与道相应的念,就叫法随观。具备这种念的人,就叫法随观者。这样,教说首先是落在个人身上。不过,就“身”而言,为了断除认为身是“净”的颠倒想,由道成就的、把握身的念,就叫身随观。就“受”而言,为了断除认为受是“乐”的颠倒想,由道成就的、把握受的念,就叫受随观。就“心”而言,为了断除认为心是“常”的颠倒想,由道成就的、把握心的念,就叫心随观。就“法”而言,为了断除认为法是“我”的颠倒想,由道成就的、把握法的念,就叫法随观。这样,与道相应的念只有一个,却因为能完成四种作用,而得到四个名称。因此说:“但在出世间道的那个刹那,它们只在一个心里出现。”巴利
Imesupi dvīsu pabbesu suddhavipassanāva kathitā. Iti ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti. Aññeneva hi cittena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhāti, aññena vedanaṃ, aññena cittaṃ, aññena dhamme pariggaṇhāti; lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhanti. Ādito hi kāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati kāyānupassanā nāma. Tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati kāyanupassanā nāma. Tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vedanaṃ pariggaṇhitvā…. Cittaṃ pariggaṇhitvā…. Dhamme pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma. Tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma. Tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Evaṃ tāva desanā puggale tiṭṭhati. Kāye pana ‘subha’nti vipallāsappahānā kāyapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti kāyānupassanā nāma. Vedanāya ‘sukha’nti vipallāsappahānā vedanāpariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti vedanānupassanā nāma. Citte ‘nicca’nti vipallāsappahānā cittapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti cittānupassanā nāma. Dhammesu ‘attā’ti vipallāsappahānā dhammapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti dhammānupassanā nāma. Iti ekāva maggasampayuttā sati catukiccasādhanaṭṭhena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhantī’ti.
2. 阿毗达摩分别注释巴利
2. Abhidhammabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
374 在《阿毗达摩分别》中,因为开示是依出世间念处而展开的,所以没有像在世间念处里那样,依色身等所缘来安立那些念处;而是不去那样安立,只是显示《法集论》(《法集论》355等)所分别的开示方法的入门,以此标示一切身随观等念处。巴利
374. Abhidhammabhājanīye lokuttarasatipaṭṭhānavasena desanāya āraddhattā yathā kāyādiārammaṇesu lokiyasatipaṭṭhānesu tanti ṭhapitā, evaṃ aṭṭhapetvā sabbānipi kāyānupassādīni satipaṭṭhānāni dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ (dha. sa. 355 ādayo) vibhattassa desanānayassa mukhamattameva dassentena niddiṭṭhāni.
在这里,应当了解理趣的差别。怎么了解呢?先以身随观为例:在入流道中,依禅那的安立,有清净行道、清净空、空行道、清净无愿、无愿行道这五种情况。在这五种情况里,每一种又各有四理趣和五理趣两种,所以共有十种理趣。其余的念处也是这样,在二十种安立中,就有二百种理趣。这二百种再乘以四种增上,成为八百。这样,清净的二百种加上增上的八百种,总共就是一千种理趣。同样,在受随观等念处以及清净念处中,在入流道就有五千种理趣。像入流道一样,其余诸道也是如此,在善法中就有二万种理趣;而按空、无愿、无相等差别来算,则又三倍于此,在异熟中就有六万种理趣。同样,通过说明各自作用成就和共同作用成就的善异熟念处,按身随观等两种方式以及清净方式,善法中有五种、异熟中有五种,总共成为十种说明轮。依这十种说明轮而有十种分类,以八万种理趣作庄严,这就是阿毗达摩分别的说明。巴利
Tattha nayabhedo veditabbo. Kathaṃ? Kāyānupassanāya tāva sotāpattimagge jhānābhinivese suddhikapaṭipadā, suddhikasuññatā, suññatapaṭipadā, suddhikaappaṇihitaṃ, appaṇihitapaṭipadāti imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ catukkapañcakanayānaṃ vasena dasa nayā honti. Evaṃ sesesupīti vīsatiyā abhinivesesu dve nayasatāni. Tāni catūhi adhipatīhi catuguṇitāni aṭṭha. Iti suddhikāni dve sādhipatīni aṭṭhāti sabbampi nayasahassaṃ hoti. Tathā vedanānupassanādīsu suddhikasatipaṭṭhāne cāti sotāpattimagge pañca nayasahassāni. Yathā ca sotāpattimagge, evaṃ sesamaggesupīti kusale vīsati nayasahassāni; suññatāpaṇihitānimittādibhedesu pana tato tiguṇe vipāke saṭṭhi nayasahassānīti. Evameva sakiccasādhakānañceva saṃsiddhikakiccānañca kusalavipākasatipaṭṭhānānaṃ niddesavasena duvidho kāyānupassanādivasena ca suddhikavasena ca kusale pañcannaṃ vipāke pañcannanti dasannaṃ niddesavārānaṃ vasena dasappabhedo asītinayasahassapatimaṇḍito abhidhammabhājanīyaniddeso.
3. 提问者注释巴利
3. Pañhāpucchakavaṇṇanā
386 386. 在问分中,念处的善等性质应当依据巴利原文来理解。不过,在所缘三法里,这些念处全都是无量所缘,因为它们缘取无量的涅槃而生起,并不是道所缘;但依俱生因来说,它们是道因;在修道时,若以精进或观慧为最上,它们就是道增上;若以欲或心为最上而修道,则不可说为道增上,在果位时也不可说;在过去等中,因为是以单一所缘的方式,也不可说;然而,由于涅槃是外法,所以它们被称为外所缘。如此,在这个问分中,所说的只是生起的出世间念处。因为正自觉者只在经分别中宣说了世间与出世间相杂的念处;而在阿毗达摩分别和问分中,则只说出世间的。这个念处分别也是如此,以三转的方式取出后,分别加以显示。巴利
386. Pañhāpucchake pāḷianusāreneva satipaṭṭhānānaṃ kusalādibhāvo veditabbo. Ārammaṇattikesu pana sabbānipi etāni appamāṇaṃ nibbānaṃ ārabbha pavattanato appamāṇārammaṇāneva, na maggārammaṇāni; sahajātahetuvasena pana maggahetukāni; vīriyaṃ vā vīmaṃsaṃ vā jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā maggabhāvanākāle maggādhipatīni; chandacittajeṭṭhakāya maggabhāvanāya navattabbāni maggādhipatīnīti phalakālepi navattabbāneva; atītādīsu ekārammaṇabhāvenapi navattabbāni; nibbānassa pana bahiddhādhammattā bahiddhārammaṇāni nāma hontīti. Evametasmiṃ pañhāpucchake nibbattitalokuttarāneva satipaṭṭhānāni kathitāni. Sammāsambuddhena hi suttantabhājanīyasmiṃyeva lokiyalokuttaramissakā satipaṭṭhānā kathitā; abhidhammabhājanīyapañhāpucchakesu pana lokuttarāyevāti. Evamayaṃ satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgopi teparivaṭṭaṃ nīharitvā bhājetvā dassitoti.